FOR Grossmont-Cuyamaca Community College District · 2021. 1. 29. · C101 GRADING AND PAVING PLAN ARCHITECTURAL AS101 SITE PLAN A100 FLOOR PLAN ... The new site work consists of

gkkworks Project No. 15070-000

District Auxiliary Offices

AT

Grossmont College

FOR

Grossmont-Cuyamaca Community College District

8800 Grossmont College Drive

El Cajon, California 92019

Prepared by:

gkkworks 1775 Hancock Street, Suite #150

San Diego, California 92110

4998 Corte Playa Palmera San Diego, CA 92124

GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT gkkworks GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

000010 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

000010 TABLE OF CONTENTS

000011 LIST OF DRAWINGS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010100 SUMMARY

010500 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING

010600 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

014200 TESTING AND INSPECTION

014300 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

017301 CUTTING AND PATCHING

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017801 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017802 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE NOT USED

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY NOT USED

DIVISION 5 – METALS NOT USED

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES NOT USED

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS NOT USED

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 099113 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 104310 SIGNAGE

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT NOT USED

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS NOT USED


TABLE OF CONTENTS

000010 - 2

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING NOT USED

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS

26 05 19 POWER CONDUCTORS

26 05 26 GROUNDING

26 05 33 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

26 05 34 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

26 05 43 UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES

26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

26 28 16 DISCONNECTS

26 90 90 TESTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 01 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS

27 10 00 VOICE – DATA INFRASTRUCTURE

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 01 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS

28 30 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTHWORK

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 ASPHALT PAVING

321313 CONCRETE PAVING

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


LIST OF DRAWINGS

000011 - 1

SECTION 000011 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

GENERAL G001 TITLE SHEET, ABBREVIATIONS, SHEET INDEX & PROJECT INFORMATION

CIVIL C100 DEMOLITION PLAN

C101 GRADING AND PAVING PLAN

ARCHITECTURAL AS101 SITE PLAN

A100 FLOOR PLAN, ELEVATIONS, FINISH SCHEDULE, MODULAR BLDG.

REQUIREMENTS

A101 TYPICAL SIGNAGE, ACCESSIBILITY NOTES, RAMP STANDARDS

ELECTRICAL E1.0 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES

E1.1 OVERALL SITE PLAN

E1.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

E2.1 FIRE ALARM SITE AND FLOOR PLAN

E2.2 FIRE ALARM SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

E3.1 PANEL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS

GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT gkkworks

GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES

SUMMARY OF PROJECT

010100-1

SECTION 010100 - SUMMARY OF PROJECT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Work covered by Contract Documents for this portion of the project. 2. Contracts. 3. Administrative and procedural sections applicable to all Contracts.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions or such other Conditions/Provisions as may be applicable to this Contract.

1.03 PROJECT-WORK COVERED BY ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work of the prime Contract shall include the construction of: 1. Project Title: District Auxiliary Offices 2. Project Location: Grossmont College

8800 Grossmont College Drive El Cajon, California 92019

3. Project Description: a. The project consists of providing and installing a new 24-foot x 60-foot

modular building (consisting of two 12-foot x 60-foot trailers/units) for use as District Auxiliary Offices. There will be no students permitted in this building. The building will be considered Non-Field Act Compliant.

b. The project location is at the north end of the campus, within Parking Lot #4 and immediately north of existing modular building for the Foundation Offices. A portion of the existing landscaped island and existing parking area is utilized for the project site.

c. The new site work consists of Building pad grading and preparation,

utility trenching and installation and hardscape (driveway and sidewalks) and “Landscaped” areas.

d. The general contractor shall provide and install a complete modular

building structure, including but not limited to foundations, interior and exterior finishes as specified, HVAC, electrical power and lighting, data, and telephone, systems.

1.04 WORK INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT

A. The Work Includes: Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Landscape.

B. District may award separate Contracts for products and installation for work as may be indicated on Drawings as NIC (Not in Contract), including but not limited to: 1. Exterior and interior signage. 2. Furniture and furnishings. 3. Movable equipment.



SUMMARY OF PROJECT

010100-2

C. Cooperate fully with separate Contractors so that work under those Contracts may be

carried out smoothly, without interfacing with or delaying work under this Contract. D. The District may award separate Contracts for additional work to be performed at the site

followings Substantial Completion.

1.05 CONTRACT

A. Perform Work of this Contract under a stipulated sum with the District. 1.06 DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract shall consist of the execution and completion of all work described in the Project Manual and the Drawings, including: 1. Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. General Conditions. 3. Drawings: All those sheets titled and numbered on the Title Sheet. 4. Project Manual. 5. Specifications: All those sections titles and numbered in the table of contents in

the forepart of the Project Manual. 6. Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 7. Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 8. Performance Bond, when required by District. 9. Labor and Material Bond, when required by District.

1.07 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings provided with and identified in the Project Manual are the Drawings referenced in the Agreement.

B. The location, extent and configuration of the required construction and improvements are shown and noted on Drawings. The Drawings are referenced in the Agreement. An index of Drawings is included on the title page of the Drawings.

C. Drawings are arranged into series according to design discipline. Such organization and all references to trades, sub-contractors, specialty contractors or suppliers shall not control the Contractor in assigning the Work among sub-contractors or in establishing the extent of the work to be performed by any trade.

D. Where the terms “as shown,” “as indicated,” “as noted,” “as detailed,” “as scheduled,” or terms of like meaning are used in the Drawings or Specifications, it shall be understood that reference is being made to the Drawings references in the Agreement.

E. Where reference to the word “plans” is made anywhere in Drawings, Specifications and related Contract Documents, it shall be understood to mean the Drawings references in the Agreement.

1.08 CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Specifications provided in the Project Manual are the Specifications referenced in the Agreement.

B. Specifications are organized by Divisions and Sections in accordance with the recommended practices of the Construction Specifications Institute, Such organization shall not control the Contractor in assigning the work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade.

C. Specifications are included in the Project Manual, which also may include other documents related to the project, including, but not limited to, Information for Bidders,



SUMMARY OF PROJECT

010100-3

Proposal Form or Bid Form, Agreement, Certifications and Attachments, Soils and Geotechnical Data, Sample Forms and Schedules.

1.09 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

A. Provide all Work identified in Divisions 1 through 16 except Work specifically assigned to other Contractors as may be specified.

PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION

3.01 USE OF PREMISES

A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work of all trades, with DISTRICT and/or Separate

Work Contract. CONTRACTOR shall sequence, coordinate, and perform the Work to

impose minimum hardship on the operation and use of the existing facilities and/or

Project site. CONTRACTOR shall install all necessary protection for existing

improvements, Project site, property, and new Work against dust, dirt, weather, damage,

vandalism, and maintain and relocate all protection to accommodate progression of the

Work.

B. CONTRACTOR shall confine entrance and exiting to the Project site and/or facilities to

routes designated by the District.

C. Within existing facilities, DISTRICT will remove portable equipment, furniture, and

supplies from Work areas prior to the start of Work. CONTRACTOR shall cover and

protect remaining items in areas of the Work

D. CONTRACTOR shall utilize all available means to prevent generation of unnecessary

noise and maintain noise levels to a minimum. When required by the District,

CONTRACTOR shall immediately discontinue noise-generating activities and/or provide

alternative methods to minimize noise generation. CONTRACTOR shall install and

maintain air compressors, tractors, cranes, hoists, vehicles, and other internal

combustion engine equipment with mufflers, including unloading cycle of compressors.

CONTRACTOR shall discontinue operation of equipment producing objectionable noise

as required by the District.

E. CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain adequate supports, shoring, and

bracing to preserve structural integrity and prevent collapse of existing improvements

and/or Work modified and/or altered as part of the Work.

F. CONTRACTOR shall secure building entrances, exits, and Work areas with locking

devices as required by the District.



SUMMARY OF PROJECT

010100-4

G. CONTRACTOR assumes custody and control of DISTRICT property, both fixed and

portable, remaining in existing facilities vacated during the Work.

H. CONTRACTOR shall cover and protect surfaces of rooms and spaces in existing facilities

turned over for the Work, including DISTRICT property remaining within as required to

prevent soiling or damage from dust, dirt, water, and/or fumes. CONTRACTOR shall

protect areas adjacent to the Work in a similar manner. Prior to DISTRICT occupancy,

CONTRACTOR shall clean all surfaces including DISTRICT property.

I. CONTRACTOR shall not use or allow anyone other than DISTRICT employees to use

facility telephones and/or other equipment, except in an emergency. CONTRACTOR

shall reimburse DISTRICT for telephone toll charges originating from the facility except

those arising from emergencies or use by DISTRICT employees.

J. CONTRACTOR shall protect all surfaces, coverings, materials, and finished Work from

damage. Mobile equipment shall be provided with pneumatic tires.

3.02 PROPERTY INVENTORY

A. Property, DISTRICT intends to remove, will be removed by DISTRICT before a room or

space is vacated for the Work. Before performing Work in each room or space,

DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed initial written inventory of

DISTRICT property remaining within, including equipment and telephone instruments and

the condition thereof. DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall retain a signed copy of the

inventory dated and signed by both parties. Prior to subsequent DISTRICT occupancy of

each such room or space, DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall perform a final inventory

of DISTRICT property and all discrepancies between the initial inventory and final

inventory shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

3.03 FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT

A. Certain furniture, fixtures, and equipment identified in the Contract Documents may be

furnished and delivered to the Project site by DISTRICT and installed by the

CONTRACTOR.

B. If designated in the Contract Documents to be DISTRICT furnished CONTRACTOR

installed (OFCI), CONTRACTOR shall unload, store, uncrate, assemble, install, and

connect DISTRICT supplied furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

C. Ninety (90) days prior to Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall notify DISTRICT

of the scheduled date for installation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment. Upon delivery

to the Project site, CONTRACTOR shall store furniture, fixtures, and equipment inside

rooms and/or protected spaces. DISTRICT will sign receipt or bill of lading as applicable.

D. CONTRACTOR shall, within ten (10) days after delivery, uncrate and/or unpack furniture,

fixtures, and equipment in presence of IOR who shall inspect the delivered items. IOR

shall prepare an inspection report listing damaged or missing parts and accessories. IOR



SUMMARY OF PROJECT

010100-5

shall transmit one copy of the report to DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR. DISTRICT will

procure and/or replace missing and or damaged furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

E. CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment in the locations and

orientation as indicated in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall verify exact

locations with DISTRICT prior to final installation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

F. If required, DISTRICT will furnish setting and or placement drawings for furniture, fixtures,

and equipment.

G. CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment by proper means and

methods to ensure an installation as recommended by the manufacturer. CONTRACTOR

shall furnish and install all necessary fasteners and required blocking to properly install

furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

H. CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment with manufacturer

recommended fasteners for the type of construction the furniture, fixtures, and equipment

are being fastened and/or anchored to.

I. CONTACTOR shall provide final connections of any electrical, signal, gas, water, waste,

venting and/or similar items to furniture, fixtures, and equipment. CONTRACTOR shall,

prior to final connection, verify the operating characteristics of furniture, fixtures, and

equipment are consistent with the designated supply.

END OF SECTION 010100


CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING

010500 - 1

SECTION 010500 - CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surveying requirements for the Work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 311000: Site Clearing

B. Section 312000: Earthwork

C. Section 321216: Asphalt Paving

D. Section 321313: Concrete Paving

1.3 SURVEY SERVICE

A. Unless otherwise stated by the Architect or noted in the Special Provisions, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all surveying services.

1.4 PAYMENT FOR SURVEYING

A. The payment for surveying shall be included in respective items of work and shall include, but not to be limited to, construction staking, location and/or relocation of conflicting utilities, locating survey monuments, setting of survey monuments and center line ties, preparing and filing centerline tie sheets and Corner Records, locating Bench Marks and notifying the Office of the County Surveyor of same, professional office services and field calculations, and furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals for doing all work involved. No additional compensation shall be allowed unless a separate bid item is provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the name and address of the State of California licensed surveyor to CMR, ARCHITECT and OWNER including any changes as they may occur.

B. CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER and/or ARCHITECT copies of cut sheets, coordinate plots, data collector printouts, and other documentation as available to verify completeness and/or accuracy of field surveying work.

C. Statement of Compliance: CONTRACTOR shall submit a statement of certification signed and sealed by Surveyor, counter-signed by CONTRACTOR indicating compliance with grade elevations, slopes and tolerances.

3.2 LAYOUT OF THE WORK

A. CONTRACTOR shall employ a State of California licensed surveyor to lay out the entire Work, set grades, lines, levels, control points, vertical and horizontal control, elevations, grids and



010500 - 2

positions. Before the commencement of Work, surveyor shall, in conjunction with OWNER and CMR provided engineering survey of the Project site, locate all reference points and benchmarks, then lay out all lines, elevations, and measurements for the entire Work including but not limited to, buildings, grading, paving and utilities.

B. All work under this contract shall be built in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the plans. Field survey for establishing these, and for the control of construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All such survey work including construction staking shall be done under the supervision of a California Licensed Land Surveyor or authorized Civil Engineer. Staking shall be done on all items ordinarily requiring grade and alignment, at intervals normally accepted by the agencies and trade involved.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any errors in the finished work, and shall notify the Engineer, in writing, within 24 hours, of any discrepancies, or design errors during the construction staking.

D. Contractor shall immediately remediate any areas found not to meet specification requirements.

3.3 PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS

A. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor’s licensed Land Surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer shall, in conformance with Section 8771 of the California State Business and Professions Code, locate all monuments (both of record and not of record), bench marks, and centerline ties within the construction zone, i.e., within one hundred feet of the construction activity. Additional ties to monuments shall be set when ties are missing (min. 4 ties per monument). The Contractor’s Surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer shall prepare and submit for review to the City Engineer separate tie sheets and Corner Record sheets (monuments not of record shall have only tie sheets prepared). Corner Records shall conform to the County Engineers’ Association of California’s “Guide to the Preparation of Records of Survey and Corner Records” document as provided by the County Surveyor’s Office. Upon review by the City Engineer, the Land Surveyor shall file the Corner Records with the County Surveyor’s Office. Certified Corner Records shall be filed with the City Engineer of the City that the work is being completed in.

B. After construction and prior to final acceptance by the Owner of the construction project, the Contractor’s land surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer shall re-survey all field monuments and centerline ties within the construction zone, prepare tie sheets and Corner Record sheets as indicated above, and file them with the City Engineer for review. After review by the City Engineer, the Land Surveyor shall file the Corner Records with the County Land Surveyors Office, and file certified copies of the Corner Records with the City Engineer.

C. All survey monuments removed or altered as a result of construction shall be reset, Corner Records filed with the County Surveyor’s Office, and approved final Corner Records filed with the City Engineer. Centerline ties removed as a result of construction shall be reset and tie sheets filed with the City Engineer.

D. The Land Surveyor shall provide a letter of certification for all monuments having four or more existing ties which are within 0.02 ft plus or minus of the original City tie sheet records. When several monuments and ties appear on one tie sheet and one of the ties has changed the Land Surveyor shall re-measure all of the ties and re-file a new tie sheet with the City as required herein.



010500 - 3

E. County of San Diego permanent and temporary bench marks within the construction zone shall be located by the surveyor, and the Contractor’s Land Surveyor shall send a written notification of impending construction to the County of San Diego Surveyor’s Office two weeks prior to construction.

3.4 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish a minimum of two permanent horizontal and vertical control points on the Project site, remote from the building area, referenced to data established by the survey control points.

B. Indicate the reference points on the project record drawings with the basis of elevation being the established benchmarks.

C. Establish lines, grades, locations and dimensions by instrumentation. From time to time, verify the layout of all Work by the same methods.

D. Provide grade stakes and elevations to construct over excavation and re-compaction, rough and final grades, paved areas, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, building pads, landscaped areas, and other areas as required.

E. Calculate and layout proposed finished elevations and intermediate control as required to provide smooth transitions between the spot elevations indicated in the Contract Documents.

F. Provide stakes and elevations for grading, fill, and topsoil placement.

G. Provide adequate horizontal and vertical control to locate utility lines, including but not limited to, storm, sewers, water mains, gas, electric and signal and provide vertical control in proportion to the slope of the line as required for accurate construction. Dry utilities will be based upon adequate horizontal and vertical control layout. Prior to trench closure, survey and record invert and flow line elevations. Survey and record top of curb and flow line elevations on finished concrete or AC surfaces at key locations such as BC’s, EC’s, grade breaks, corners or angle points in sufficient number to demonstrate the Work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents.

H. Provide horizontal and vertical control for batter boards for drainage, utility, and other on-site structures as required.

I. Furnish building corner offsets as required to adequately locate building pads. Provide cut and fill stakes within the building pad perimeter adequate to control both over excavation and re-compaction and the final sub-grade elevation of the building pad.

J. Submit a certification, signed by the surveyor, confirming the elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance with the Contract Documents. The statement shall include survey notes for the finish floor and building pad, showing the actual measured elevations on the completed sub-grade, recorded to the nearest 0.01’. Building pad tolerance will be +- 0.10’.

3.5 ESTABLISHMENT OF GRADES IN HARDSCAPE AREAS

A. All work shall conform to the lines, elevations, and grades shown on the Grading Plans. Three consecutive points set on the same slope shall be used together so that any variation from a straight grade can be detected. Any such variation shall be reported to the Engineer. In the



010500 - 4

absence of such report, the Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the grade of the finished work.

B. Areas having drainage gradients of 2 percent or more shall have elevation stakes, set with instrument, at grid intervals of 25 feet. Intermediate stakes may be set by using a tightly-drawn string line over the tops of adjacent stakes. Grade stakes must be set at all grade breaks, grade changes, etc.

C. Areas having drainage gradients of less than 2 percent shall have elevation stakes, set with instrument, at 10 foot intervals. Grade stakes must be set at all grade breaks, grade changes, etc.

D. Protect and maintain stakes in place until their removal is approved by the Owner. Grade or location stakes lost or disturbed by Contractor, shall be reset by the Surveyor at the expense of Contractor.

3.6 STORM DRAIN & SANITARY SEWER PIPE INSTALLATION

A. All storm drain pipelines, sanitary sewer pipelines, trench drains, catch basins, cleanouts and drain inlets shall be staked by a licensed surveyor if slope of grade is less than 2% and a complete set of cut sheets shall be supplied to the Inspector. All construction staking shall be installed and verified for grade and alignment prior to the start of construction.

3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Upon Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for reproducible transparencies of the as built survey drawings. Deliver to ARCHITECT, final “record” drawings of the original drawings and completed Work within specified tolerances.

B. Record drawings shall indicate locations by coordinate of all utilities onsite with top of pipe elevations at major grade and alignment changes, rim grate or top-of-curb and flow line elevations of all drainage structures and manholes.

C. Completed record drawing transparencies shall be signed and certified as correct and within specified tolerances by the licensed surveyor.

D. Attention is called to other sections of the Contract Documents requiring verification or measurements of installed Work by survey. Surveyor shall perform and certify all such surveys or verification are completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.



STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

010600 - 1

SECTION 010600 - STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

1.1 General: The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to protect channels, storm drains, and bodies of water from pollution.

A. Conduct and schedule operations to minimize or avoid muddying and silting channels, drains, and waters.

B. As required, obtain permits for erosion and water pollution control from the appropriate jurisdictional agency before starting Work.

C. Provide any necessary water pollution control devices to prevent, control, and abate water pollution, and implement good housekeeping pollution control measures to reduce the discharge of pollutants from work sites to the maximum extent practicable. These water pollution control devices include drains, gutters, slope protection blankets and retention basins and shall be constructed concurrently with other Work at the earliest practicable time.

D. Exercise care in preserving vegetation and protecting property, to avoid disturbing areas beyond the limits of the Work. Promptly repair any damage caused by Contractor operations.

E. Comply with the specific requirements based on acreage of disturbed soil.

F. Penalties: Failure to comply with this Section may result in significant fines and possible imprisonment. The RWQCB or other prosecuting authority may assess fines of up to $32,500 per day for each violation. Should the Owner be fined or penalized as a result of the Contractor failing to comply with this Section, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any and all fines, penalties and related costs.

G. Notification and Report: If pollution occurs in the work area for any reason or when the Contractor becomes aware of any violation of this Section, correct the problem and immediately notify the Inspector. In addition, submit a written report to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days describing the incident and the corrective actions taken. If either the Inspector or Engineer is first to observe pollution or a violation, the Contractor shall also explain in the written report why the Work was inadequately monitored.

H. The provisions of this Section describe minimum compliance and do not preclude other more stringent stormwater pollution control measures that may be required in the Contract.

1.2 Definitions

A. “Construction activity": Operations such as clearing, grading, disturbances to the ground such as stockpiling, or excavation that results in soil disturbances. If construction activity is part of a larger common plan of development, the amount of disturbed soil is the total land area of disturbed soil that results under the common plan.

1.3 Payment: All costs for work required for compliance with this Section shall be included within the Bid Prices for other items of work.



010600 - 2

1.4 Liabilities & Penalties:

A. Payment of penalties for non-compliance by CONTRACTOR shall be the sole responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

B. Compliance with the Clean Water Act pertaining is the sole responsibility of

CONTRACTOR. Any fine against OWNER due to non-compliance by CONTRACTOR, OWNER shall recover all costs of the fine by appropriate OWNER Assessment.

2.1 Construction activity: Comply with the following minimum water quality protection requirements.

A. Retain eroded sediments and other pollutants on-site and do not allow transportation from the site by sheet flow, swales, area drains, natural drainage, or wind. Control slope and channel erosion by implementing an effective combination of best management practices (BMPs). Such BMPs include scheduling grading during non-rainy seasons, planting and maintaining vegetation on slopes and covering erosion-susceptible slopes.

B. Protect stockpiles of earth and other construction-related materials from being transported from the site by wind or water.

C. Properly store and handle fuels, oils, solvents, and other toxic materials to not contaminate the soil or surface waters, enter the groundwater, or be placed where they may enter a live stream, channel, drain, or other water conveyance facility. Protect all approved toxic storage containers from weather. Clean spills immediately and properly dispose of cleanup materials. Spills shall not be washed into live streams, channels, drains, or other water conveyance facilities. IF RAIN OR STORM WATER RUN OFF COMES IN CONTACT WITH POLLUTANTS (SUCH AS SOIL STABILIZERS, PAINT OR FLUID FROM VEHICLES) REPORT TO INSPECTOR IMMEDIATELY. CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO SAMPLE AND REMEDIATE CONTAMINATED WATER.

D. Do not wash excess or waste concrete into the public way or any drainage system. Retain concrete wastes on-site until they can be appropriately disposed of or recycled.

E. Deposit trash and construction-related solid wastes in covered receptacles to prevent contamination of rainwater and dispersal by wind.

F. Do not allow sediments and other materials to be tracked from the site by vehicle traffic. Stabilize construction entrance roadways to inhibit sediments from being deposited onto public ways. Immediately sweep up accidental depositions. Do not allow depositions to be washed away by rain or by any other means.

G. Contain non-stormwater runoff from equipment or vehicle washing and any other activity at the work site.

H. At completion of the Work, clear the worksite of debris and restore to a condition at least equal to or better than prior to construction.

I. When working in live streams, these are additional water pollution control requirements.

1. Erect barriers sufficient to prevent muddying or polluting streams.



010600 - 3

2. Prior to removing materials from a flowing stream, use a stream bypass or other equivalent means to keep the flow in the stream free of the mud or silt from the removal operations.

3. Avoid transporting materials across live streams. If not possible, the transportation operation must be designed to prevent materials from falling into the stream and cannot muddy the stream.

4. Equipment may not be operated in a live stream or channel unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the Engineer’s satisfaction that no other practical alternatives exist. The equipment must be designed to prevent materials from falling into the stream and cannot muddy the stream.

5. Do not allow fresh portland cement or fresh portland cement concrete to enter the water flowing in streams, channels or drains.

6. Do not allow material derived from the Work to be deposited in a live stream, channel or drain.

3.1 Maintenance

A. To ensure the proper implementation and functioning of control measures, the Contractor shall regularly inspect and maintain the construction site. The Contractor shall identify corrective actions and time needed to address any deficient measures or reinitiate any measures that have been discontinued. Inspections of the construction site shall be conducted by the Contractor to identify deficient measures, as follows:

1. Prior to a forecast storm;

2. At 24-hour intervals during extended precipitation events; 3. After all precipitation, which causes runoff capable of carrying sediment from the

construction site; and; 4. Routinely, at a minimum of once every week during the rainy season (October 1st

– April 30th) and once every month during non-rainy season (May 1st – September 30th).

B. All temporary and/or permanent post-construction control measures shall be maintained

and regularly inspected by the Contractor after all improvements are in place and accepted by the Owner. Temporary and/or permanent post-construction landscaping maintenance shall include but not limited to, watering, seeding, hydro-seeding, matting, slope stabilization, re-vegetation, and any other maintenance control measures recommended by the Owner to insure proper erosion control and plant growth.




TESTING AND INSPECTION

014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing and inspection services to meet requirements of the 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Parts 1 and 2, as indicated on the Drawings.

B. One or more certified inspectors employed by the OWNER in accordance with the requirements of California Building Standards Administrative Code will be assigned to the Work with their duties as specifically defined in Section 4-333(b).

C. Tests of materials are required by a certified testing agency as set forth in Section 4-335 of the California Building Standards Administrative Code.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TESTS

A. OWNER will select an independent testing agency to conduct tests, sampling, and testing of materials. Selection of material to be tested shall be by the agency and not by CONTRACTOR.

B. Any material shipped from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from IOR such testing and inspection is not required shall not be incorporated into the Work.

C. OWNER will select and directly reimburse testing agency the costs for all required tests and inspections, but may be reimbursed by CONTRACTOR for such costs as noted in related sections of the Contract Documents.

D. The independent testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. The agency shall not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR.

E. CONTRACTOR shall provide an insulated curing box for concrete cylinders and will relocate said box and cylinders as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.

3.02 TEST REPORTS

A. Test reports shall include all tests performed, regardless of whether such tests indicate the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be reported. Records of special sampling operations as required shall also be reported. Reports shall indicate the material or materials were sampled and tested in accordance with requirements of CBC, Title 24, Parts 1 and 2, as indicated on the Drawings. Test reports shall indicate specified design strength. They shall also definitely state whether or not material or materials tested comply with the specified requirements.



TESTING AND INSPECTION

014200 - 2

3.03 VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS

A. Each testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect, Architect, and Construction Manager, a verified report in duplicate covering tests which are required to be performed by that agency during progress of the Work. Such report shall be furnished each time construction on the Work is suspended, covering tests up to that time, and prior to Final Completion of the Work, covering all tests.

3.04 INSPECTION BY OWNER

A. OWNER and its representatives shall at all times have access, for purpose of inspection, to all parts of the Work and to shops wherein the Work is in preparation, and CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection.

B. OWNER shall have the right to reject materials and/or workmanship deemed defective Work, and to require correction. Defective workmanship shall be corrected in a satisfactory manner and defective materials shall be removed from the premises and legally disposed of, all without charge to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, OWNER may correct such defective Work and proceed in accordance with related Articles of the Contract Documents.

C. CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance to all applicable local, state, and federal regulations regarding codes, regulations, ordinances, restrictions, and requirements.

3.05 INSPECTOR OF RECORD

A. Inspector of Record is employed by OWNER in accordance with requirements of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations with their duties specifically defined therein.

B. Inspection of Work shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from any obligation to fulfill all of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling times of inspection, tests, sample taking, and similar activities of the Work.

3.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Tests and inspections do not limit inspection of the Work but are required by Code, other agencies, or are required in related Sections of the Contract Documents.

B. Excavations, Foundations and Retaining Walls - CBC, Chapter 18A.

C. Concrete – CBC, Chapter 19A.

D. Masonry - CBC, Chapter 21A.

E. Steel - CBC, Chapters 17A & 22A.

F. Site work, Demolition & Construction, Chapters 18A.

END OF SECTION


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014300 - 1

SECTION 014300 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.

2. Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,



014300 - 2

or operation; they are not Samples. Accepted mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a District approved testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the MOST STRINGENT requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1. The contractor shall also assume the HIGHEST COST in the Bid for conflicting requirements.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



014300 - 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.



014300 - 4

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.



014300 - 5

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager.

2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work,

fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.



014300 - 6

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.



014300 - 7

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Construction Manager, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and required special inspector(s) to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 7. Submit Final Verified Report at completion of accepted work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.



014300 - 8

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

016000 - 1

SECTION 0165000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 2. Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.




016000 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 10 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 14 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.




016000 - 3

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor, through Construction Manager, of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request.

a. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor, through Construction Manager, of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 14 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.




016000 - 4

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.




016000 - 5

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.




016000 - 6

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days prior to Bid Opening. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.




016000 - 7

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)




EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Surveying" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and




017300 - 2

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Construction Manager that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.




017300 - 3

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Construction Manager and Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Construction Manager and Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels

exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding.




017300 - 4

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 9 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.




017300 - 5

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.




017300 - 6

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.




017300 - 7

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.




CUTTING AND PATCHING

017301 - 1

SECTION 017301 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. See Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or




017301 - 2

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.




017301 - 3

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.




017301 - 4

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "General Conditions" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 2

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "General Conditions."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 3

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 5

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017801 - 1

SECTION 017801 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.

1) Electronic Media: CD-R.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.




017801 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following District’s and/or Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately.

4. Mark record sets with revisions in red. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.




017801 - 3

3. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information.

4. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.




017801 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

1. Construction Manager to review on a regular basis.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.




OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017802 - 1

SECTION 017802 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,

systems and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit three copies of each manual in final form at least 14 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 14 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit three copies of each corrected manual within 14 days of receipt of Architect's comments.




017802 - 2

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect.




017802 - 3

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.




017802 - 4

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.




017802 - 5

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.




017802 - 6

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.




017802 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.




SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 010100 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements". 3. Section 017301 “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above-grade and below-

grade improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.




024119 - 2

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.




024119 - 3

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection services and routes during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.




024119 - 4

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of the site.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.




024119 - 5

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



PAINTING 099113-1

SECTION 099113 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, the District’s Representative will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Reference data to the District’s painting systems. Include manufacturer's statement that components are appropriate to each painting system.


PAINTING 099113-2

1. .Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for District’s Representative's review of color and texture only:

a. Color Samples: 8-1/2 by 11 inch card of each color for approval prior to

commencing work. Samples shall be for color approval only, not texture or finish. Submit in sufficient time to avoid delaying progress of work.

C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

1.4 STANDARD OF QUALITY: The products specified and manufactured are to conform to the Paint Specifications when indicated, and shall be considered as the minimum acceptable standard of quality.


A. All painting and coating materials shall meet or exceed the EPA and/or California State environmental regulations, which ever is more restrictive, for the maximum allowable amount VOC content.

B. Statement of Application: Upon completion, submit written statement signed by the Contractor, his applicator and the manufacturer, stating that painting systems complied with the specifications, and the application methods complied with manufacturer's printed instructions and were proper and adequate for conditions of application and performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

D. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. District’s Representative will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 40 sq. ft..


PAINTING 099113-3

b. Small Areas and Items: District’s Representative will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, District’s Representative will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.


PAINTING 099113-4

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to District.

1. Quantity: Furnish District with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:

a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal of each color applied. c. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal of each color applied. d. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied. e. Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal of each color applied. f. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal of each color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 1. Frazee Paint Company (Frazee).

a. Basis-of-Design

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's premium-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Match Architect’s samples.


PAINTING 099113-5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify District’s Representative about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and

mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.


PAINTING 099113-6

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

d. Concrete shall be dry before any sealer or paint is applied. Determine substrate moisture content with appropriate moisture meter.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash

coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.


PAINTING 099113-7

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match

exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. Two finish coats over a primer are specified. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions

show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets.


PAINTING 099113-8

6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material.

7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. District reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as District deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. District may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.


PAINTING 099113-9

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by District’s Representative.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT Finish Coats: a. Frazee 215 Royal Supreme 100% Acrylic Low Luster @ 1.6 mils DFT

per coat

B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over properly prepared exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces. Use Chemco Metal Enhancer to degrease and prepare zinc-coated metal prior to priming: 1. Low-Luster Finish Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. Primer: a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT

Finish Coats: a. Frazee 215 Royal Supreme 100% Acrylic Low Luster @ 1.6 mils DFT

per coat

C. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over properly prepared exterior aluminum

surfaces. Use Chemco Metal Enhancer to degrease and prepare aluminum prior to priming:: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

Primer: a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT

Finish Coats: a. Frazee 124 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Semigloss Enamel @ 1.4 mils DFT

per coat


PAINTING 099113-10

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer.

Primer: a. Frazee 061 Aquaseal Wall Sealer @ 1.3 mils DFT Finish Coats: a. Frazee 022 LoGlo Acrylic Eggshell Enamel @ 1.6 mils DFT per coat

B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. Primer: a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT Finish Coats: a. Frazee 011 Velvin Acrylic Copolymer Flat @ 1.6 mils DFT per coat

2. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

Primer: a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT Finish Coats: a. Frazee 126 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Low Sheen Enamel @ 1.8 mils

DFT per coat

3. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

Primer: a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT Finish Coats: a. Frazee 124 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Semigloss Enamel @ 1.4 mils DFT

per coat



SIGNAGE 104310 - 1

SECTION 104310 – SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Panel signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 2. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border. 3. 6-inch long sections of each profile.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.


SIGNAGE 104310 - 2

D. Signage and Graphics:

1. Tactile character type: Tactile characters on signs shall be raised 1/32” inch (0.794 mm) minimum and shall be sans serif uppercase characters accompanied by Contracted Grade 2 Braille (See note below). 2013 CBC.

2. Tactile character size: Raised characters shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) and a maximum of 2 inches (51 mm) high. 2013 CBC.

3. Finish and contrast: Contrast between character, symbols and their background must be 70% minimum and have a non-glare finish. 2013 CBC.

4. Proportions, 2013 CBC:

a. Characters on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio of between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width-to-height ratio of between 1:5 and 1:10.

b. All letters measured must be uppercase. After choosing a typestyle to test, begin by printing the letters, I, X, and O at 1 inch high. Place the template’s 1:1 square over the X or O, whichever is narrower. If the character is not wider than 1 inch, nor narrower than the 3:5 rectangle, the proportions are correct. Use the 1:5 rectangle to determine if the stroke of the I is too broad, and the 1:10 rectangle to see if it is too narrow. If all the tests are passed, the typestyle is compliant with proportion requirement..

5. Braille, 2013 CBC:

a. California (Contracted) Grade 2 Braille shall be used wherever Braille is required in other portions of these standards.

b. Dots shall be 1/10 inch (2.54 mm) on center in each cell with 2/10 inch (5.08 mm) space between cells, measured from the second column of dots in the first cell to the first column of dots in the second cell.

c. Dots shall be raised a minimum of 1/40 inch (0.635 mm) above the background. Braille dots shall be domed or rounded.

6. Mounting location shall be determined so that a person may approach within 3 inches (76 mm) of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of the door. 2013 CBC.


A. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.


SIGNAGE 104310 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 2. Or District approved equal.

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Beveled. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated. 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with

contrasting colors.

C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory paint brackets in color matching background color of panel sign.

D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

E. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

F. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.


SIGNAGE 104310 - 4

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


SIGNAGE 104310 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ©JCE #15079 26 01 00-1

SECTION 26 01 00

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ARTICLE 1 SUMMARY

1.1 This Division of the specification outlines the provisions of the contract work to be performed under this Division.

1.2 This Section applies to and forms a part of each section of specifications in Division 26

and all work performed under the electrical and communications contracts.

1.3 In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under general requirements.

1.4 These specifications contain statements which may be more definitive or more restrictive

than those contained in the General Conditions. Where these statements occur, they shall take precedence over the General Conditions.

1.5 Where the words 'provide' or 'provision' are used, it shall be definitely interpreted as

'furnishing and installing complete in operating condition'. Where the words 'as indicated' or 'as shown' are used, it shall mean as shown on contract drawings.

1.6 Where items are specified in the singular, this Division shall provide the quantity as

shown on drawings plus any spares or extras mentioned on drawings or specifications. All specified and supplied equipment shall be new.

ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

2.1 The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 Electrical Contractor’s license and all individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of Industrial Relations Division of apprenticeship Standards – “Electrician Certification Program.”

ARTICLE 3 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

3.1 Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes, or rulings of governmental units having jurisdiction as well as standards of NFPA, and serving utility requirements.

3.2 Obtain permits, fees, inspections, meter and the like, associated with work in each

section of this Division.

3.3 Installation procedures, methods and conditions shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

ARTICLE 4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

4.1 Examine the construction drawings and premises prior to bidding. No allowances will be made for not being knowledgeable of existing conditions.


ARTICLE 5 STANDARDS

5.1 The following standard publications of the latest editions enforced and supplements thereto shall form a part of these specifications. All electrical work must, as a minimum, be in accordance with these standards.

5.1.1 2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3 Title 24 CCR. 5.1.2 National Fire Protection Association. 5.1.3 Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 5.1.4 Certified Ballast Manufacturers' Association (CBM). 5.1.5 National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 5.1.6 Institution of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 5.1.7 American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM). 5.1.8 National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU). 5.1.9 National Board of Standards (NBS). 5.1.10 American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 5.1.11 Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPECS). 5.1.12 Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 5.1.13 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 5.1.14 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24 CCR. 5.1.15 2013 California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR. 5.1.16 2013 NFPA 72 with California State Amendments 5.1.17 National Electrical Testing Association (NETA), 2010 or most current

ARTICLE 6 DEFINITIONS

6.1 Concealed: Hidden from sight, as in trenches, chases, hollow construction, or above furred spaces, hung ceilings - acoustical or plastic type, or exposed to view only in tunnels, attics, shafts, crawl spaces, unfinished spaces, or other areas solely for maintenance and repair.

6.2 Exposed, Non-Concealed, Unfinished Space: A room or space that is ordinarily

accessible only to building maintenance personnel, a room noted on the 'finish schedule' with exposed and unpainted construction for walls, floors, or ceilings or specifically mentioned as 'unfinished'.

6.3 Finish Space: Any space ordinarily visible, including exterior areas.

ARTICLE 7 WORK AND MATERIALS

7.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials must be new and of the best quality. Materials previously incorporated into other projects, salvaged, or refurbished are not considered new. Perform all labor in a thorough and workmanlike manner.

7.2 All materials provided under the contract must bear the UL label where normally

available. Note that this requirement may be repeated under equipment specifications. In general, such devices as will void the label should be provided in separate enclosures and wired to the labeled unit in proper manner.

ARTICLE 8 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

8.1 Submit shop drawings and all data in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and as noted below for all equipment provided under this Division.


8.2 Shop drawings submittals demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept. The Contractor demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods of material and equipment he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and specifications are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed, notify the Architect immediately.

8.3 Manufacturer’s data and dimension sheets shall be submitted giving all pertinent physical

and engineering data including weights, cross sections and maintenance instructions. Standard items of equipment such as receptacles, switches, plates, etc., which are cataloged items, shall be listed by manufacturer.

8.4 Index all submittals and reference them to these specifications. All submittal items shall

be assembled and submitted, one for each specification section. (Multiple specification sections may be grouped together in one common submittal binder, as long as each individual section is clearly identified.) Partial or incomplete submittal sections will not be reviewed.

ARTICLE 9 EQUIPMENT PURCHASES

9.1 Arrange for purchase and delivery of all materials and equipment within 20 days after approval of submittals. All materials and equipment must be ordered in ample quantities for delivery at the proper time. If items are not on the project in time to expedite completion, the Owner may purchase said equipment and materials and deduct the cost from the contract sum.

9.2 Provide all materials of similar class or service by one manufacturer.

ARTICLE 10 COOPERATIVE WORK

10.1 Correct without charge any work requiring alteration due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provision in time. Correct without charge any damage to adjacent work caused by the alteration.

10.2 Cooperative work includes: General supervision and responsibility for proper location

and size of work related to this Division, but provided under the other sections of these specifications, and installation of sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts for work under each section in this Division.

ARTICLE 11 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS

11.1 Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate only. Before proceeding with work, carefully check and verify dimensions, etc., and be responsible for properly fitting equipment and materials together and to the structure in spaces provided.

11.2 Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and many offsets, bends, pull boxes, special

fittings, and exact locations are not indicated. Carefully study drawings and premises in order to determine best methods, exact location, routes, building obstructions, etc. and install apparatus and equipment in manner and locations to avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and maintain proper clearances.


ARTICLE 12 CUTTING AND PATCHING

12.1 All cutting and patching shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and as noted below.

12.2 Cut existing work and patch as necessary to properly install new work. As the work

progresses, leave necessary openings, holes, chases, etc., in their correct location. If the required openings, holes, chases, etc., are not in their correct locations, make the necessary corrections at no cost to the Owner. Avoid excessive cutting and do not cut structural members including wall framing without the consent of the Architect.

ARTICLE 13 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK

13.1 Cover no work until inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Where work is covered before inspection and test, uncover it and when inspected, tested, and approved, restore all work to original proper condition at no additional cost to Owner.

ARTICLE 14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

14.1 All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and as noted below.

14.2 Perform all necessary excavation, shoring, and backfilling required for the proper laying

of all conduits inside the building and premises, and outside as may be necessary.

14.3 Excavate all trenches open cut, keep trench banks as nearly vertical as practicable, and sheet and brace trenches where required for stability and safety. Excavate trenches true to line and make bottoms no wider than necessary to provide ample work room. Grade trench bottoms accurately. Machine grade only to the top line of the conduits, doing the remainder by hand. Do not cut any trench near or under footings without first consulting the Architect. All trenches shall be done in accordance with OSHA standards and regulations.

14.4 Backfilling shall be done with each layer compacted before another layer is added. No

stones or coarse lumps shall be laid directly on a conduit or conduits.

14.5 Trenches shall be filled with the specified material. Sod, if any, shall be removed in cut sections and replaced in same manners.

14.6 Provide pumps and drainage of all open trenches for purposes of installing electrical duct

and wiring.

14.7 Perform all backfilling in accordance with the requirements of and under the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer.

14.8 Where new underground trenching is required on sites or in any area where existing

underground utilities exist, the Contractor shall provide an independent professional utility locating service to locate exact vertical and horizontal locations of all existing utilities. Where existing utilities are found the Contractor shall hand dig those areas to avoid disruption. The Contractor shall be responsible for immediate repairs to existing underground utilities damaged during construction. The Contractor shall repair all existing asphalt, concrete and landscape surfaces damaged or removed during construction to match their original conditions. Where trenching extends through public streets or roadways, the Contractor shall notify underground service alert in addition to the


independent locating service 48 hours before start of construction to determine location of existing utilities by calling (800) 422-4133.

ARTICLE 15 CONCRETE

15.1 Where used for structures to be provided under the contract such as bases, etc., concrete work, and associated reinforcing shall be as specified under Division 3 of these specifications.

15.2 See other sections for additional requirements for underground vaults, cable ducts, etc.

ARTICLE 16 ACCESSIBILITY

16.1 Install all control devices or other specialties requiring reading, adjustment, inspection, repairs, removal, or replacement conveniently and accessibly throughout the finished building.

16.2 All required access doors or panels in walls and ceilings are to be furnished and installed

as part of the work under this Section. Refer to Division 1 of these specifications and as noted below.

16.3 Where located in fire rated assemblies, provide doors which match the rating of the

assembly and are approved by the jurisdictional authority.

16.4 Refer to 'finish schedule' for types of walls and ceilings in each area and the architectural drawings for rated wall construction.

16.5 Coordinate work of the various sections to locate specialties requiring accessibility with

others to avoid unnecessary duplication of access doors. ARTICLE 17 FLASHING

17.1 Flash and counter flash all conduits penetrating roofing membrane as shown on Architectural drawings. All work shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications.

ARTICLE 18 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

18.1 All electrical equipment shall be labeled, tagged, stamped, or otherwise identified in accordance with the following schedules:

18.1.1 General:

18.1.1.1 In general, the installed laminated nameplates as hereinafter called

for shall also clearly indicate its use, areas served, circuit identification, voltage and any other useful data.

18.1.1.2 All auxiliary systems, including communications, shall be labeled to

indicate function.

18.1.2 Lighting and Local Panelboards:

18.1.2.1 Panel identification shall be with white and black micarta nameplates. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.


18.1.2.2 Circuit directory shall be two column typewritten card set under glass or glass equivalent. Each circuit shall be identified by the room number and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required.

18.1.3 Distribution Switchboards and Feeders Sections:

18.1.3.1 Identification shall be with 1" x 4" laminated white micarta

nameplates with black lettering on each major component, each with name and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.

18.1.3.2 Circuit breakers and switches shall be identified by number and

name with 3/8" x 1-1/2" laminated micarta nameplates with 3/16" high letters mounted adjacent to or on circuit breaker or switch.

18.1.4 Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters and Transformers:

18.1.4.1 Identification shall be with white micarta laminated labels and 3/8"

high black lettering.

18.1.5 All communication system terminal boxes including T.V., telephone/intercom, security, fire alarm, clock, and computer networking shall be provided with white micarta laminated labels and 3/8" high black lettering.

ARTICLE 19 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

19.1 Furnish and maintain from the beginning to the completion all lawful and necessary guards, railings, fences, canopies, lights, warning signs, etc. Take all necessary precautions required by City, State Laws, and OSHA to avoid injury or damage to any persons and property.

19.2 Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under this

Section. All work shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications. ARTICLE 20 GUARANTEE

20.1 Guarantee all material, equipment and workmanship for all sections under this Division in writing to be free from defect of material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance, as outlined in the general conditions. Replace without charge any material or equipment proven defective during this period. The guarantee shall include performance of equipment under all site conditions, conditions of load, installing any additional items of control and/or protective devices, as required.

ARTICLE 21 PATENTS

21.1 Refer to the General Conditions for Contractor's responsibilities regarding patents.

ARTICLE 22 EQUIPMENT ROUGH-IN

22.1 Rough-in all equipment, fixtures, etc. as designed on the drawings and as specified herein. The drawings indicate only the approximate location of rough-ins. Mounting heights of all switches, receptacles, wall mounted fixtures and such equipment must be coordinated with the Architectural Designs. The Contractor shall obtain all rough-in information before progressing with any work for rough-in connections. Minor changes in


the contract drawings shall be anticipated and provided for under this Division of the specifications to comply with rough-in requirements.

ARTICLE 23 OWNER FURNISHED AND OTHER EQUIPMENT

23.1 Rough-in and make final connections to all Owner furnished equipment shown on the drawings and specified, and all equipment furnished under other sections of the specifications.

ARTICLE 24 EQUIPMENT FINAL CONNECTIONS

24.1 Provide all final connections for the following:

24.1.1 All equipment furnished under this Division.

24.1.2 Electrical equipment furnished under other sections of the specification.

24.1.3 Owner furnished equipment as specified under this Division. ARTICLE 25 INSERTS, ANCHORS, AND MOUNTING SLEEVES

25.1 Inserts and anchors must be:

25.1.1 Furnished and installed for support of work under this Division.

25.1.2 Mounting of equipment that is of such size as to be free standing and that equipment which cannot conveniently be located on walls, such as motor starters, etc., shall be rigidly supported on a framework of galvanized steel angle of Unistrut or B-line systems with all unfinished edges painted.

25.1.3 Furnish and install all sleeves as required for the installation of all work under all

Sections of this Division and for all communication systems including any communication systems described in this Section which are bid to the General Contractor. Sleeves through floors, roof, and walls shall be as described in “Conduit and Fittings” Section 26 05 33.

ARTICLE 26 SEISMIC ANCHORING

26.1 All switchgear and other free standing electrical equipment or enclosures shall be anchored to the floor and braced at the top of the equipment to the structure. Where details have not been provided on the drawings, anchorage shall comply with CBC Section 1616A.1.12. The Contractor shall submit drawings signed by the Contractors registered structural Engineer indicating method of compliance prior installation.

26.2 All sound systems, communication, signal or data networking equipment or enclosures

shall be anchored to the structure. Where details have not been provided on the drawings, anchorage shall comply with CBC Section 1616A.1.12. The Contractor shall submit drawings signed by the Contractors registered Structural Engineer indicating method of compliance prior to installation.

ARTICLE 27 RUST PROOFING

27.1 Rust proofing must be applied to all ferrous metals and shall be in accordance with Section 05500 of these specifications and as noted below.


27.1.1 Hot-dipped galvanized shall be applied and after forming of angle-iron, bolts,

anchors, etc.

27.1.2 Hot-dipped galvanized coating shall be applied after fabrication for junction boxes and pull boxes cast in concrete.

ARTICLE 28 GENERAL WIRING

28.1 Where located adjacent in walls, outlet boxes shall not be placed back to back, nor shall extension rings be used in place of double boxes, all to limit sound transmission between rooms. Provide short horizontal nipple between adjacent outlet boxes, which shall have depth sufficient to maintain wall coverage in rear by masonry wall.

28.2 In those instances where outlet boxes, recessed terminal boxes, or recessed equipment

enclosures are installed in a fire rated assembly, provide "Flamesafe FSD 1077" fire stopping pads or approved equal, over the outlet or box.

28.3 Complete rough-in requirements of all equipment to be wired under the contract are not

indicated. Coordinate with respective trades furnishing equipment or with the Architect as the case may be for complete and accurate requirements to result in a neat, workmanlike installation.

ARTICLE 29 SEPARATE CONDUIT SYSTEMS

29.1 Each electrical and signal system shall be contained in a separate conduit system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This includes each power system, each lighting system, each signal system of whatever nature, telephone, standby system, sound system, control system, fire alarm system, etc.

29.2 Further, each item of building equipment must have its own run of power wiring. Control

wiring may be included in properly sized conduit for equipment feeders of #6 AWG and smaller, having separate conduit for larger sizes.

ARTICLE 30 CLEANUP

30.1 In addition to cleanup specified under other sections, thoroughly clean all parts of the equipment. Where exposed parts are to be painted, thoroughly clean off any spattered construction materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Wipe the surface carefully and scrape out all cracks and corners.

30.2 Use steel brushes on exposed metal work to carefully remove rust, etc., and leave

smooth and clean.

30.3 During the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of debris. ARTICLE 31 PAINTING

31.1 Paint all unfinished metal as required in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications. (Galvanized and factory painted equipment shall be considered as having a sub-base finish.)

ARTICLE 32 GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS


32.1 Remove existing work and items which are required to be removed in such manner that minimum damage and disturbance is caused to adjacent and connection work scheduled to remain. Repair or replace existing work schedule.

32.2 Include preparation of existing areas to receive new materials and removal of materials

and equipment to alter or repair the existing building as indicated and as specified.

32.3 Perform demolition exercising proper care to prevent injury to the public, workmen and adjoining property.

32.4 Perform the removal, cutting, drilling of existing work with extreme care and use small

tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. 32.5 Rebuild to existing condition or better, existing work which has to be removed to allow the

installation of new work as required.

32.6 Remove, protect and reinstall existing items as indicated. Replace materials scheduled for reuse which are damaged by the Contractor to the extent that they cannot be reused, with equal quality material, and installation.

32.7 Do not reuse in this project materials and items removed from existing site or building,

except with specific written approval by the Architect in each case, unless such removed material or item is specifically indicated or specified to be reused.

32.8 Remove materials and equipment indicated to be salvaged for reinstallation and store to

prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. Do not reuse in this project, other materials and equipment removed from existing site or building, except with specific written approval by the Architect in each case.

32.9 Patch areas requiring patching, including damage caused by removing, relocating or

adding fixtures and equipment, damages caused by demolition at adjacent materials.

32.10 Do not stockpile debris in the existing building, without the approval of the Architect. Remove debris as it accumulates from removal operations to a legal disposal area.

32.11 Contractor to assume existing oil filled and dry transformers, oil switches, ballasts, lamps,

wooden poles, cross arms, computers, computer monitors, and conductor insulation containing materials considered hazardous. Comply with local, state and federal regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Contractor shall be responsible for removal of the above hazardous materials where encountered. Include all costs for such removal as part of this contract.

32.12 All fluorescent, compact fluorescent, high intensity discharge, metal halide, mercury

vapor, high and low pressure sodium, and neon lamps are to be disposed of as required by the California Waste Rule Regulations as described in the California Code of Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5 and Chapter 23.

32.13 Communication System: Where new communication systems, (including telephone,

intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia, CATV or lighting controls) are installed to replace existing systems, unless where otherwise directed the existing systems shall remain fully operational until the new system has been installed and tested. Demolition of the existing systems shall include removal of all equipment and associated wiring and exposed conduits and providing new blank covers for all abandoned device locations.


32.14 Salvage Power Equipment: The Contractor shall carefully remove all existing

switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and confirm in writing which items the Owner wishes to keep. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance facilities by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

32.15 Salvage Lighting Equipment: The Contractor shall confirm in writing which items the

Owner wishes to keep. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance facilities by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

32.16 Salvage Communication Equipment: The Contractor shall carefully remove all communication devices (telephone, intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia, CATV or lighting controls) and box each type of devices separately. The Contractor shall deliver all items to the Owner’s maintenance facility.

ARTICLE 33 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

33.1 Prior to completion of project, compile a complete equipment maintenance manual for all equipment supplied under sections of this Division, in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and as described below.

33.2 Equipment Lists and Maintenance Manuals:

33.2.1 Prior to completion of job, Contractor shall compile a complete equipment list and

maintenance manuals. The equipment list shall include the following items for every piece of material equipment supplied under this Section of the specifications:

33.2.1.1 Name, model, and manufacturer.

33.2.1.2 Complete parts drawings and lists.

33.2.1.3 Local supply for parts and replacement and telephone number.

33.2.1.4 All tags, inspection slips, instruction packages, etc., removed from

equipment as shipped from the factory, properly identified as to the piece of equipment it was taken from.

33.3 Maintenance manuals shall be furnished for each applicable section of the specifications

and shall be suitably bound with hard covers and shall include all available manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions, together with "as-built" drawings to properly operate and maintain the equipment. The equipment lists and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in duplicate to the Architect for approval not less than 10 days prior to the completion of the job. The maintenance manuals shall also include the name, address, and phone numbers of all subcontractors involved in any of the work specified herein. Four copies of the maintenance manuals bound in single volumes shall be provided.

ARTICLE 34 RECORD DRAWINGS

34.1 The Division 26 Contractor shall maintain record drawings as specified in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and as noted below.


34.2 Drawings shall show locations of all concealed underground conduit runs, giving the number and size of conduit and wires. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations and shall be dimensioned in relation to permanent structures to indicate their exact location. Drawing changes shall not be identified only with referencing CORs and RFIs, the drawings shall reflect all of the actual additions or changes made. All as-built drawing information shall be prepared by the contractor in AutoCAD, updating the contract computer files as needed to reflect actual installed conditions for all site plans, lighting, power, communication, networking, audio visual, security or fire alarms systems included in the scope of work for this project.

34.3 One set of these record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. The engineer will

review documents for completeness, and will not be responsible for editing contractor computer files.

ARTICLE 35 CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK

35.1 When changes in work are requested, the Division 26 Contractor shall provide unit prices for the work involved in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and the following:

35.1.1 The material Costs shall not exceed the latest edition of the “Trade Service“ end

column “C” price list. The materials prices may be higher only where the Contractor can produce invoices to substantiate higher material costs. The Contractor shall submit a print out copy of the trade service sheets with the change order to substantiate these values.

35.1.2 The labor Costs shall not exceed the latest edition of the “NECA Manual of

Labor Units” normal column.

35.2 When credits in work are requested, the Division 26 Contractor shall provide unit prices for the work involved in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and the following:

35.2.1 The Material Costs shall not be less than 80% of the latest edition of the “Trade

Service“ end column price list. The materials prices may be lower only where the Contractor can produce invoices to substantiate lower material costs. Restocking fees may also be included in this amount where applicable.

35.2.2 The Labor Costs shall not be less than 80% of the latest edition of the “NECA

Manual of Labor Units” normal column.

35.3 Conduit pricing for conduits of all types sized 3" or smaller.

When changes in the scope of work require the Contractor to estimate conduit Installations, they shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be included) for any of the below items. The labor values for conduit installation represented in the NECA manual are inflated to a point where additional labor for the below items can not be justified.

35.3.1 Couplings.

35.3.2 Set Screw or Compression Fittings, locknuts, Bushings and washers.

35.3.3 Conduit straps and associated screws or nails.


35.3.4 LB fittings or other specialty fittings or specialty mounting hardware may be included where needed.

35.4 Wire pricing for all types and sizes.

When changes in the scope of work require the Contractor to estimate wire installations they shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be included) for any of the below items. The labor values for wire installation represented in the NECA manual are inflated to a point where additional labor for the below items can not be justified.

35.4.1 Locknuts, Bushings, tape, wire markers.

35.5 When changes in the scope of work require other equipment installations such as lighting

fixtures, panelboards, switchboards, wiring devices, communications equipment etc. the Contractor shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be included) for any of the below items. The labor values for these equipment items represented in the NECA manual are inflated to a point where additional labor for the below items can not be justified.

35.5.1 Associated screws, nails, bolts, anchors or supports.

35.5.2 Locknuts, washers, tape.

35.6 The total labor hours for extra work will be required to be calculated as follows:

35.6.1 Change orders with 1 to 30 total labor hours

General Laborer 10% of total labor hours Journeyman 10% of total labor hours Foreman 80% of total labor hours

35.6.2 Change orders with 31 to 100 total labor hours General Laborer 20% of total labor hours Journeyman 40% of total labor hours Foreman 40% of total labor hours

35.6.3 Change orders with over 100 total labor hours General Laborer 30% of total labor hours Journeyman 50% of total labor hours Foreman 20% of total labor hours

35.7 When change orders are issued which allow the work to be completed in the normal sequence of construction, the labor rates shall be based on the most current “Prevailing Wage” – straight time total hourly rate. When change orders require the Contractor to work out of sequence the “Prevailing Wage“ – daily overtime hourly rate shall apply. Special condition situations shall be reviewed on an individual basis for alternate hourly rate schedules.

35.8 Costs will not be permitted for additional supervision on site or office time for processing

any change order other than the 10% overhead allowance as described in Division 1. Cost for special equipment required to install items for an individual change order are permitted and must be individually identified. Lump Sum cost for small tools or any other cost not specifically required for the change order are not permitted.


35.9 Contractor estimates shall be formatted to clearly identify each of the following:

35.9.1 Line item description of each type of material or labor item.

35.9.2 Description of quantity for each item.

35.9.3 Description of (material cost per / quantity).

35.9.4 Description of (labor cost per / quantity).

35.9.5 Description of total labor hour breakdown per Foreman, Journeyman or General

Laborer as described above. ARTICLE 36 ELECTRONIC FILES

36.1 The Contractor shall make a written request directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers for electronic drawing files. As a part of the written request, please include the following information:

36.1.1 Clearly indicate each drawing sheet needed (i.e., E1.1, E2.1, etc.).

36.1.2 Identify the name, phone number, mailing address and e-mail address of the

person to receive the files.

36.1.3 Provide written confirmation and agreement with the requirements described for payment of computer files, as described below.

36.2 Detail or riser diagram sheets, or any other drawings other than floor plans or site plans,

will not be made available to the Contractor.

36.3 Files will only be provided in the AutoCAD format in which they were created.

36.4 Requests for files will be processed as soon as possible; a minimum of 7 working days should be the normal processing time. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for requesting the files in time for their use.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College POWER CONDUCTORS ©JCE #15079 26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19

POWER CONDUCTORS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install wire and cable for branch circuits and feeders specified herein and as

shown on the electrical drawings. 1.2 Submittals: Submit manufacturers’ data for the following items:

1.2.1 All cables and terminations

1.3 Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:

1.3.1 Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.

1.3.2 Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly identifying by highlighting, underlining, or clouding the items to be reviewed, or crossing out the items which are not applicable.

1.3.3 Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.

1.3.4 Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The products being submitted must be the products installed

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Wire and cable Rated 120 volt to 600 volt.

2.1.1 All wire and cable shall be new, 600 volt insulated copper, of types specified below for each application. All wire and cable shall bear the UL label and shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages. Wire insulation shall be the color as specified herein and shall be type THWN-2. Insulated conductors shall be installed in all exterior exposed raceways. Conductors for branch circuit lighting, receptacle, power and miscellaneous systems shall be a minimum of No. 12 AWG. Increase conductor size to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than 100 feet from the panel to the load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet from the panel to the load. Circuit home-runs indicated to be larger than No. 12 must be increased the entire length of the circuit, including equipment grounding conductor. Wire sizes No. 14 through No. 10 shall be solid. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.

2.1.2 Aluminum conductors will not be permitted.

2.1.3 MC type armored cable reference Section 26 05 33.

2.2 Wire and cable for systems below120 volts.

2.2.1 All low voltage and communications systems cables routed underground shall be provided with a moisture resistant outer jacket, West Penn “Aquaseal” or equal, unless otherwise specified.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Wire and cable shall be pulled into conduits without strain using powdered soapstone, mineralac, or other approved lubricant. In no case shall wire be repulled if same has been pulled out of a conduit run for any purpose. No conductor shall be pulled into conduit until conduit system is complete, including junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.

3.2 All connections of wires shall be made as noted below:

3.2.1 Connections to outlets and switches: Wire formed around binding post of screw.

3.2.2 No. 10 wire and smaller: Circuit wiring connections to lighting fixtures and other hard wired equipment shall be made with pressure type solderless connectors, Buchanan, Scotchlock, Wing Nut, or approved equal. Alternate “WAGO” #773 series or “IDEAL” #32, 33, 34 and 39 series push wire style connectors are also acceptable.

3.3 All wiring shall be continuous without splicing unless where specifically noted on the drawings or where permitted below.

3.3.1 No. 10 wire and smaller above grade: Quantities as needed, connection made with pressure type solderless connectors, Scotchlock or equal.

3.3.2 No. 10 wire and smaller below grade: Quantities as needed, connection made with ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).

3.3.3 No. 8 wire and larger above grade: Quantities only where indicated, ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).

3.3.4 No. 8 wire and larger below grade: Quantities only where indicated, ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).

3.4 All wiring throughout shall be color coded as follows:

480 volt system 208 or 240 volt system A Phase Brown Black B Phase Orange Red C Phase Yellow Blue Neutral Grey White Ground Green Green

3.5 Wiring must be color coded throughout its entire length, except feeders may have color coded plastic tape at both ends and any other accessible point.


3.6 All control wiring in a circuit shall be color coded, each phase leg having a separate color, and with all segments of the control circuit, whether in apparatus or conduit, utilizing the same color coding.

3.7 At all terminations of control wiring, the wiring shall have a numbered T&B or Brady plastic wire marker.

3.8 Cables when installed are to be properly trained in junction boxes, etc., and in such a manner as to prevent any forces on the cable which might damage the cable.

3.9 All conductors to be installed into a common raceway, shall be pulled into the raceway at the same time.

3.10 All conductors shall be installed in such a manner as to not exceed the manufacturers’ recommended pulling tension and bending radius. The equipment used for pulling must be specifically designed for the purpose. Motorized vehicles such as pickup trucks, are not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College GROUNDING ©JCE #15079 26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install grounding and grounding conductors and electrodes as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

1.2 Submit catalog data for all components.



1.3.2 Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or crossing out the items which are not applicable.


1.3.4 Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The products being submitted must be the products installed.

PART 2 – EXECUTION

2.1 Grounding

2.1.1 All panelboard cabinets, equipment, enclosures, and complete conduit system shall be grounded securely in accordance with pertinent sections of CEC Article 250. Conductors shall be copper. All electrically operated equipment shall be bonded to the grounded conduit system. All non-current carrying conductive surfaces that are likely to become energized and subject to personal contact shall be grounded by one or more of the methods detailed in CEC Article 250. All ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces. Install all grounding conductors in conduit and make connections readily accessible for inspection.

2.1.2 Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit and feeder raceway systems, sized in accordance with CEC 250-1122.

2.1.3 Provide an additional individual insulated grounding conductor for each circuit which contains an isolated ground receptacle or surge suppression receptacle.

2.1.4 Grounding of metal raceways shall be assured by means of provisions of grounding bushings on feeder conduit terminations at the panelboard, and by means of insulated continuous stranded copper grounding wire extended from the ground bus in the panelboard to the conduit grounding bushings.

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College GROUNDING ©JCE #15079 26 05 26-2

2.1.5 Except for connections which access for periodic testing is required, make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise inaccessible by exothermite type process.

2.1.6 The following ohmic values shall be test certified for each item listed. A written report signed and witnessed by the project IOR shall be provided to the engineer. If the ohmic value listed cannot be obtained additional grounding shall be installed to reach the value listed.

2.1.6.1 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ohms.

2.1.6.2 Step down transformers and non-current carrying metal parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ohms. 2.1.6.3 Manholes, handholes, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ohms.


Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College CONDUIT AND FITTINGS ©JCE #15079 26 05 33-1

SECTION 26 05 33

CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install conduit and fittings as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 Submit Manufacturer’s data on the following:

1.2.1 Conduit. 1.2.2 Fittings 1.2.3 Fire stopping Material. 1.2.4 Surface Raceways. 1.2.5 Type MC cable, provide construction details and UL “E” number.

1.3 Common submittal mistakes which will resulting in the submittals being rejected:





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and flexible metallic conduit shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

2.2 PVC conduit shall be Carlon or approved equal.

2.3 Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite type UA or approved equal. Fittings shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Steel City, T&B, or equivalent.

2.4 MC type armored cable, when utilized, shall be provided with the following:

2.4.1 Comply with UL 1479 and CEC 330-22(c).

2.4.2 90ºC, copper, THHN conductors.


2.4.3 Minimum #12 insulated grounding conductor.

2.4.4 Conductors sized No. 10 and smaller shall be solid, No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.

2.4.5 Oversized (150%) neutrals or separate neutrals shall be provided.

2.4.6 Increase phase conductors to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than 100

feet from panel to load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet from panel to load. Where required increase conductor sizes for entire length of circuit.

2.4.7 Interlocked armored aluminum sheath.

2.4.8 AC or BX type armored cable shall not be substituted in lieu of MC type cable.

2.4.9 Color code cable according to cable type and configuration.

2.4.10 Acceptable manufacturers are AFC and Alflex.

2.5 Fire stopping material shall provide an effective seal against fire, heat, smoke and fire

gases. Fire stopping material shall be tested to comply with ASTME 814 and UL 1479. The submittal for this product shall include the UL listed system number and installation requirements for each type of penetration seal required for this project.

2.6 Each length of conduit shall be stamped with the name or trademark of the manufacturer

and shall bear the UL label.

2.7 All plastic conduit shall be rigid, schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. All PVC conduit shall be UL listed. Underground utility company conduits shall comply with local utility co. requirements.

2.8 Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface, and protected from the direct rays of the

sun.

2.9 Where branch circuit or communication raceways cannot be concealed in ceilings or walls and are required to be exposed in interior spaces, provide nonmetallic surface raceway system sized per the manufacturer capacity requirements. A full complement of nonmetallic fittings must be available and matching device boxes and cover plates must be provided. The color of the raceway system, components and boxes shall be (white). Where data networking cabling is to be installed, all raceway fittings shall meet Category 5 radius requirements. Where specific raceway types have been noted on the drawings they shall be as follows:

2.9.1 System 'SR' Hubbell WALLTRAK 1 series

Wiremold ECLIPSE PN05series Panduit LD5 series Hellerman-Tyton TSR2 series

2.9.2 System 'SR2' Hubbell WALTRAK 22 Wiremold 2300D Series

Panduit D2P10


Hellerman-Tyton TSR3 series

2.9.3 System 'SR3' Hubbell BASETRAK series Wiremold 5400 - series Panduit 70 series Hellerman-Tyton MCR Infostream" series

Provide with offset boxes, inline boxes may only be used where specifically shown on the drawings.

PART 3 – FITTINGS

3.1 All metallic fittings, including those for EMT, flexible conduit, or malleable iron. Die cast fittings of any other material are not permitted.

3.2 Locknuts shall be steel or malleable iron with sharp clean cut threads.

3.3 Entrance seals shall be 0.Z. type FSK or equivalent.

3.4 Bushings and locknuts: Where conduits enter boxes, panels, cabinets, etc., they shall be

rigidly clamped to the box by locknuts on the outside, and a lock nut and plastic bushing on the inside of the box. All conduits shall enter the box squarely.

3.5 Furnish and install insulated bushings as per CEC article No. 300 - 4 (F) on all conduits.

The use of insulated bushings does not exclude the use of double locknuts to fasten conduit to the box.

3.6 Transition from plastic to steel conduits shall be with PVC female threaded adaptors.

3.7 Couplings and connectors for rigid steel or IMC conduit must be threaded, or

compression type (set screw fittings are not permitted).

3.8 Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be compression, watertight. Set screw connectors are not acceptable, except for systems below 120 volts.

3.9 MC type armored cable shall be provided with listed clamp type die cast zinc set screw

connectors. Anti-short bushings shall be provided at all cable ends.

3.10 Connectors for flexible metal conduit shall be steel or malleable iron with screw provided to clinch the conduit into the adapter body. For sizes up to ¾'' a screw-in, "Jake type,” fitting may be used.

3.11 Install approved expansion fittings, or liquid tight flex conduit with a minimum 6" slack for

conduits passing through all expansion and seismic joints. PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 All branch circuits shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceilings or in concrete floor slabs. PVC conduits installed in concrete floor slabs shall transition to PVC coated rigid steel where conduits penetrate above finished grade or finished floor.


4.2 Conduit sizes for various numbers and sizes of wire shall be as required by the CEC, but not smaller than ½" for power wiring and ¾" for communications and fire alarm systems unless otherwise noted. Conduit in slab or below grade shall be ¾" minimum trade size, unless otherwise identified.

4.3 Conduit size shall be such that the required number and sizes of wires can be easily

pulled in and the Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the conduit sizes to facilitate the ease of pulling. Conduit sizes shown on the drawings are minimum sizes in accordance with appropriate tables in the CEC. If because of bends or elbows a larger conduit size is required, the Contractor shall so furnish without further cost to the Owner.

4.4 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the proper protection of this work from the other trades on the job. When conduit becomes bent or holes are punched through same, or outlets moved after being roughed-in, the Contractor shall replace same, without additional cost to the Owner.

4.5 Rigid steel conduit or IMC shall be used as follows:

4.5.1 Exposed exterior locations.

4.5.2 Exposed interior locations below eight feet above floor, except in electrical rooms

and closets.

4.5.3 In hazardous or classified areas as required by CEC.

4.6 EMT conduit shall be used for areas as follows:

4.6.1 All interior communications, signal, and data networking systems.

4.6.2 All interior power wiring systems where not required to be in rigid steel, IMC or flexible conduit.

4.7 Flexible conduit shall be used for areas as follows:

4.7.1 To connect motors, transformers, and other equipment subjected to vibration or

where specifically detailed on the drawings.

4.7.2 Flexible conduit shall not be used to replace EMT in other locations where the conduit will be exposed.

4.7.3 Flexible metal conduit shall be ferrous. Installation shall be such that

considerable slack is realized. The conduit shall contain separate code sized grounding conductor.

4.7.4 Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in conformance with CEC in lengths not

to exceed 4'. For equipment connections, route the conduit at 90 degrees to the adjacent path for point of connection. The conduit shall contain separate code sized grounding conductor. Use liquid tight flexible conduit for all equipment connections exposed in possible wet, corrosive or oil contaminated areas, e.g., shops and outside areas.


4.8 MC armored cable may be used as follows:

4.8.1 All branch circuit wiring for lighting and power circuits where permitted and installed in compliance with UL 1569 and CEC 330.

4.9 MC armored cable shall not be used for the following areas:

4.9.1 Any exterior, underground or buried in concrete circuits.

4.9.2 Any circuits feeding HVAC equipment or pumps or any circuit with 30 AMPs or

greater overcurrent protection.

4.9.3 Any exposed interior locations except in electrical, communication or mechanical equipment rooms.

4.9.4 Any exposed interior damp/wet locations, kitchens, science classrooms, shop

areas, or concealed in science classroom casework, unless provided with approved PVC jacket.

4.9.5 Any hazardous rated area.

4.10 Plastic conduit shall be used for all exterior underground, in slab, and below slab on

grade conduit installations. Install bell ends at all conduit terminations in manholes and pull boxes. Where plastic conduit transitions from below grade to above grade, no plastic conduit shall extend above finished exterior grade, or above interior finished floor level.

4.11 Plastic conduit joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations for the particular conduit and coupling selected. Conduit joint couplings shall be made watertight. Plastic conduit joints shall be made up by brushing a plastic solvent cement on the inside of a plastic fitting and on the outside of the conduit ends. The conduit and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick one-quarter turn twist to set the joint tightly.

4.12 All underground conduit depths shall be as detailed on the drawings or a minimum of 30"

below finished grade (when not specifically detailed otherwise), for all exterior underground conduits. Where concrete slurry or concrete encasement is provided, include “Red” color dye in mixture.

4.13 All underground conduits for power systems (600v and higher), shall be concrete

encased and a minimum of 48” below grade or as detailed on the drawings. Where concrete slurry or concrete encasement is provided, include “Red” color dye in mixture.

4.14 Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, cabinet or junction box, and shall be so

arranged that wire may be pulled in with the minimum practical number of junction boxes.

4.15 All conduits shall be concealed wherever possible. All conduit runs may be exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, electrical closets, and in existing or unfinished spaces. No conduit shall be run exposed in finished areas without the specific approval of the Architect.


4.16 All raceways which are not buried or embedded in concrete shall be supported by straps, clamps, or hangers to provide a rigid installation. Exposed conduit shall be run in straight lines at right angles to or parallel with walls, beams, or columns. In no case shall conduit be supported or fastened to other pipes or installed to prevent the ready removal of other trades piping. Wire shall not be used to support conduit.

4.17 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to consult the other trades before installing

conduit and boxes. Any conflict between the location of conduit and boxes, piping, duct work, or structural steel supports, shall be adjusted before installation. In general, large pipe mains, waste, drain, and steam lines shall be given priority.

4.18 Conduits above lay-in grid type ceilings shall be installed in such a manner that they do

not interfere with the "lift-out" feature of the ceiling system. Conduit runs shall be installed to maintain the following minimum spacing wherever practical.

4.18.1 Water and waste piping not less than 3".

4.18.2 Steam and steam condensate lines not less than 12".

4.18.3 Radiation and reheat lines not less than 6".

4.19 Provide all necessary sleeves and chases required where conduits pass through floors or

walls as part of the work of this section. Core drilling will only be permitted where approved by the Architect.

4.20 All empty conduits and surface mounted raceways shall be provided with a ¼"

polypropylene plastic pull cord and threaded plastic or metal plugs over the ends. Fasten plastic "Dymo" tape label to exposed spare conduit to identify "power" or "communication" system, and to where it goes.

4.21 The ends of all conduits shall be securely plugged, and all boxes temporarily covered to

prevent foreign material from entering the conduits during construction. All conduit shall be thoroughly swabbed out with a dry swab to remove moisture and debris before conductors are drawn into place.

4.22 Bending: Changes in direction shall be made by bends in the conduit. These shall be

made smooth and even without flattening the pipe or flaking the finish. Bends shall be of as long a radius as possible, and in no case smaller than CEC requirements.

4.22.1 For power conduits for conductors (600v and below), provide minimum 36” radius

(vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.

4.22.2 For power conduits for conductors (greater than 600v), provide minimum 72” radius (vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.

4.23 Supports: Conduit shall be supported at intervals as required by the California Electrical Code. Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by approved conduit straps or beam clamps. Straps shall be secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry, machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces, and wood screws on wood construction. [No perforated straps or wire hangers of any kind will be permitted. Where individual conduits are routed, or above ceilings, they shall be supported by


hanger rods and hangers.] Conduits installed exposed in damp locations shall be provided with clamp backs under each conduit clamp, to prevent accumulation of moisture around the conduits.

4.24 Where a number of conduits are to be run exposed and parallel, one with another, they

shall be grouped and supported by trapeze hangers. Hanger rods shall be fastened to structural steel members with suitable beam clamps or to concrete inserts set flush with surface. A reinforced rod shall be installed through the opening provided in the concrete inserts. Beam clamps shall be suitable for structural members and conditions. Rods shall be galvanized steel 3/8" diameter minimum. Each conduit shall be clamped to the trapeze hanger with conduit clamps.

4.25 All concrete inserts and pipe clamps shall be galvanized. All steel bolts, nuts, washers,

and screws shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. Individual hangers, trapeze hangers and rods shall be prime-coated.

4.26 Openings through fire rated floors/walls and/or smoke walls through which conduits pass

shall be sealed by Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat, smoke and fire gases. Sleeves shall be provided for power or communication system cables which are not installed in conduits, and shall be sealed inside and out to comply with manufacturers UL system design details. Where multiple conduits and/or cable tray systems pass thru fire-rated walls at one location, the Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturers UL system design details proposed for use on this project. All Fire stopping material shall have an hourly fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.

4.27 Provide cap or other sealing type fitting on all spare conduits. Conduits stubbed into

buildings from underground where cable only extends to equipment, the conduit/cable end shall be sealed to prevent moisture from entering the room or space.

4.28 All conduits which are part of a paralleled feeder or branch circuit shall be installed

underground.

4.29 All conduits which are required as a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or any other low voltage communication systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor.

4.29.1 The Contractor shall coordinate all conduit requirements with each system

supplier prior to bid to determine special conduit system requirements.

4.29.2 The Contractor shall provide a pull rope in all conduits for these systems.

4.29.3 The Contractor shall provide conduit sleeves for all open cable installations thru rated walls or block walls. Provide conduit from each building main termination cabinet or backboard to the nearest accessible ceiling for access into all electrical or communications rooms.

4.30 In addition to the above requirements, the following requirements shall apply to all data

networking conduits:


4.30.1 Flexible metal conduit may only be used where required at building seismic and/or expansion joints.

4.30.2 All underground conduits shall be provided with minimum 24" radius elbows

(vertical) and 60” (horizontal).

4.30.3 No length of conduit above grade shall be installed to exceed 150 feet between pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the drawings.

4.30.4 No length of conduit shall be installed to exceed two 90 degree bends between

pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the drawings.

4.31 Where surface raceways are installed in interior spaces, the Contractor shall take care to

route in straight lines at right angles to or parallel with walls, beams, or columns. All raceways and device boxes shall be securely screwed to the finish surface with zinc screw “Auger” anchors Stk #ZSA1K by Gray Bar Electric or equal. Tape adhesive application will not be permitted.

4.32 The Contractor who installs surface raceway systems shall provide and install complete

with wire retention clips, one for every (8) vertical feet or (5) horizontal feet or portion thereof. This Contractor shall also provide each raceway channel with pull strings.

4.33 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor installing the raceway to coordinate the

installation of raceway device plates and inserts with the communications or data contractors.

4.34 MC cable shall be cut using a specific metallic sheath armor stripping tool. The use of

hacksaws, dikes or any other tools not specifically designed to remove the armor sheath will not be permitted.

4.35 MC cables installed in attic spaces or above lay-in ceilings shall be installed to be

protected from physical damage. The cable shall be mounted along the sides or bottom of joists, rafters or studs.

4.36 Support wires used for supporting ceilings, lighting fixtures or other equipment items shall

not be used to support MC cables. Conduits, duct work, piping or any other equipment shall not be used to support or mount MC cables.

4.37 MC cable supports, fasteners and clips shall be designed specifically for use with MC

cables. Standard conduit supports, fasteners and clips, nails or other items are not permitted for installing MC cables.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ©JCE #15079 26 05 34-1

SECTION 26 05 34

OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install electrical wiring boxes as specified and as shown on the electrical

drawings. 1.2 Submit manufacturer's data for all items. 1.3 Common submittal mistakes which will resulting in the submittals being rejected:





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Boxes shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco, or approved equal. 2.2 All boxes must conform to the provisions of Article 370 of the CEC. All boxes shall be of

the proper size to accommodate the quantity of conductors enclosed in the box. Minimum box size shall be 4" square x 1-½" deep.

2.3 Boxes generally shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with knockouts. Boxes on exterior

surfaces or in damp locations shall be corrosion resistant, cast feraloy and shall have threaded hubs for rigid conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Boxes shall be Appleton Type FS, Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Conduit bodies shall be corrosion resistant, cast malleable iron. Conduit bodies shall have threaded hubs for rigid conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Conduit bodies shall be Appleton Unilets, Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Where recessed, boxes shall have square cut corners.

2.4 Deep boxes shall be used in wall covered by wainscot or paneling and in walls or glazed

tile, brick, or other masonry which will not be covered with plaster. Through the wall type boxes shall not be used unless specifically called for. All boxes shall be nongangable. Boxes in concrete shall be of a type to allow the placing of conduit without displacing the reinforcing bars. All lighting fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with the proper fittings to support and attach a light fixture.


2.5 All light, switch, receptacle, and similar outlets shall be provided with approved boxes, suitable for their function. Back boxes shall be furnished and installed as required for the equipment and/or systems under this contract.

2.6 Pull and junction boxes shall be code gauge boxes with screw covers. Boxes shall be

rigid under torsional and deflecting forces and shall be provided with angle from framing where required. Boxes shall be 4" square with a blank cover in unfinished areas and with a plaster ring and blank cover in finished areas. Covers for flush mounted oversize boxes shall extend ¾" past boxes all around. Covers for 4" square boxes shall extend ¼" past box all around.

2.7 All terminal cabinets and junction boxes or equipment back boxes which are required as

a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or any other low voltage communication systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor.

2.7.1 The Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate all box requirements with each

system supplier prior to bid to determine special cabinet or back box requirements. The Contractor shall also provide stainless steel blank cover plates for all low voltage systems installed for future equipment.

2.7.2 The Contractor shall provide all plywood backboards indicated on walls or inside

equipment enclosures. All backboards shall be a minimum of ¾" thick fire rated type plywood.

2.7.3 The Contractor shall coordinate exact rough in locations and requirements with

each system supplier.

2.8 In addition to the above requirements, boxes for data networking wiring and equipment shall comply with the following:

2.8.1 All boxes shall be a minimum of 4-11/16" square x 2-1/8" deep. 2.8.2 Where pull boxes are required on individual conduits 1-¼" or smaller, provide 4-

11/16" square x 2-1/8" deep boxes. Where pull boxes are required on conduits larger than 1-¼" for straight pull through, provide eight times the conduit trade size for box length. Where pull boxes are required on conduits larger than 1-¼" for an angle or a U-pull through installation, provide a minimum distance of six times the conduit trade size between the entering and exiting conduit run for each cable.

2.9 Recessed boxes installed in fire rated floors/walls and /or smoke walls shall be sealed by

Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat, smoke and fire gases. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturers UL system design details proposed for use on this project. All Fire stopping material shall have an hourly fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.


3.1 Boxes shall be installed where required to pull cable or wire, but in finished areas only by approval of the Architect. Boxes shall be rigidly attached to the structure, independent of any conduit support. Boxes shall have their covers accessible. Covers shall be fastened


to boxes with machine screws to ensure continuous contact all around. Covers for surface mounted boxes shall line up evenly with the edges of the boxes.

3.2 Outlets are only approximately located on the plans and great care must be used in the

actual location of the outlets by consulting the various detailed drawings and specifications. Outlets shall be flush with finished wall or ceiling, boxes installed symmetrically on such trim or fixture. Refer to drawings for location and orientation of all outlet boxes.

3.3 Furnish and install all plaster rings as may be required. Plaster rings shall be installed on

all boxes where the boxes are recessed. Plaster rings shall be of a depth to reach the finished surface. Where required, extension rings shall be installed so that the plaster ring is flush with the finished surface.

3.4 All cabinets and boxes shall be secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry;

expansion shields and machine screws or standard precast inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood construction. All wall and ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be supported by bar supports extending from the studs or channels on either side of the box. Boxes mounted on drywall or plaster shall be secured to wall studs or adequate internal structure.

3.5 Boxes with unused punched-out openings shall have the openings filled with factory-

made knockout seals.

3.6 Where standby power and normal power are to be located in the same outlet box or 480V in a switch box, install partition barriers to separate the various systems.

3.7 All outlet boxes and junction boxes for fire alarm system shall be painted red.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES ©JCE #15079 26 05 43–1

SECTION 26 05 43

UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install electrical underground pullboxes and manholes as specified and as shown on the electrical drawings.

1.2 Submit manufacturer's data for all items.





1.3.4 Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or approved equal” statements or “to be determined later” statements. The products being submitted must be the products installed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 The concrete for pull boxes and manholes shall be class 5500 psi or as noted on the drawings. All pullboxes and manholes and covers located in parking lots, driveways, roads, or any other driveable areas shall be traffic rated.

2.2 Each manhole shall be provided with a fiberglass ladder and ground rod. Ground rods shall be copper or a copper-clad steel 3/4" diameter by 10-feet long. All non-current carrying metallic components shall be grounded to the ground rods with minimum #6 copper wire.

2.3 All underground pullboxes shall be provided with steel bolt down type covers. Bolts shall be bronze or brass. All communication or signal system pullboxes shall be sized to comply with CEC Article 370 unless where other sizes are specifically noted on the drawings.

2.4 All underground pullbox and manhole covers shall be provided with either "electrical" or "telephone" or "fire alarm" markings. The telephone marking shall be used to identify telephone, T.V., clock or any other types of communication systems.

2.5 All power and communication systems shall be provided with separate pullboxes or manholes. Fire alarm circuits shall also be provided with separate pullboxes from any other type of communication systems.

PART 3 – INSTALLATION

3.1 Shoring of the excavation shall be in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations.

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES ©JCE #15079 26 05 43–2

3.2 Provide sealing material for the joints between sections per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 The contractor shall make the top and access assembly or lid flush with surrounding areas where installed in driveable or normal walking areas.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College PANELBOARDS ©JCE #15079 26 24 16–1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANEL BOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install branch circuit panel boards as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. Submit manufacturers’ data on all items.

1.2 Submit manufacturers’ data on all panel boards and components including:

1.2.1 Enclosures and covers

1.2.2 Breakers

1.2.3 Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment

1.2.4 Incident energy level calculations

1.2.5 Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:

1.2.5.1 Not arranging the circuit breakers in panels to match the orientations indicated on the drawings. In other words, if a 30 amp breaker is shown on the drawing in Space #2, this must be the location it appears on the submittal schedule. Standard factory arrangements will not be accepted.

1.2.5.2 Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.

1.2.5.3 Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or crossing out the items which are not applicable.

1.2.5.4 Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.

1.2.5.5 Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or approved equal” statements or “to be determined later” statements. The products being submitted must be the products installed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 The interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be 10,000 amps for the 120/208 system and 14,000 amp for 277/480 volt systems. Refer to drawings for higher interrupting rating requirements. All components and equipment enclosures shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Circuit breakers shall be permitted to be series rated to limit the available fault current to no more than the above ratings.

2.2 All panels shall be fully bussed. Recessed panel enclosures shall be a maximum of 20" wide and 5-3/4" deep for all panels 600 amp rated and less.


2.3 All busses shall be tin-plated aluminum and shall be located in the rear of the panelboard cabinet. Individual circuit breakers shall be bolt on type and removable from the cabinet without disturbing the bussing in any way. All panel boards shall contain ground busses.

2.4 Panel covers shall be door in door style, with one lock. Door lock shall allow access to breakers only. Access to wireways without removal of cover shall be permitted by (non removable) screws behind the locked door. Panel cover shall be provided with full length piano hinge. All locks for all panels provided in this project shall be keyed alike.

2.5 Each panel shall have a two-column circuit index card set under glass or glass equivalent on the inside of the door. Each circuit shall be identified as to use and room or area. Areas shall be designated by room numbers. Room numbers shown on the drawings may change and contractor shall verify final room numbers with the architect prior to project completion.

2.6 Tandem mounted or wafer type breakers are not acceptable.

2.7 Multiple breakers shall have one common trip handle or be internally connected. Handle ties are not acceptable.

2.8 Breaker arrangements shown in the drawings shall be maintained. The circuit breakers in panels must match the orientations indicated on the drawings. In other words, if a 30 amp breaker is shown on the drawing in Space #2, this must be the location it appears on the submittal schedule. Standard factory arrangements will not be accepted.

2.9 Where conductor sizes exceed the standard breaker lug wire range, or where multiple conductors per phase are required, the panelboard manufacturer shall provide the breaker with suitable lugs for terminating the specified conductors.

2.10 Acceptable manufacturers are Square D, Eaton, Siemens or General Electric.

2.11 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.10 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.


3.1 Painting of panelboard covers in finished areas shall be done by the general contractor.

3.2 Provide a spare 3/4" conduit stubbed to an accessible area for each of every three (3) spares or spaces provided in recessed panel boards.

3.3 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.

Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

3.4 The Contractor is to provide, and submit to the engineer for approval, incident energy level calculations as determined using the methodologies described in NFPA 70E or IEEE standard 1584-2002.

3.4.1 All studies shall be performed by “Emerson Electric ” (858) 695-9551, MTA (858) 472-0193, or Terra Power Solutions (858) 380- 8170. Studies performed by manufactures or other engineering or t esting companies


must submit qualifications for approval by Johnson Consulting Engineers, 7 days prior to bid for this project .

3.5 A warning label, as specified in the above standard, shall be placed on each switchboard, panelboard, and safety switch indicating the incident energy levels on the equipment to warn qualified personnel in accordance with NFPA 70E, section 110.16 Labels shall be laminated white micarta with black lettering on each. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.

3.6 The incident level calculations for each piece of equipment shall be given to the owner and maintained on file by the maintenance department

3.7 The design goal is to minimize the incident energy to which a maintenance employee may be exposed.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College DISCONNECTS ©JCE #15079 26 28 16–1

SECTION 26 28 16

DISCONNECTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all disconnect switches as shown on the drawings and as required by the CEC.

1.2 Submit manufacturers’ data for all disconnects and fuses.

1.2.1 Disconnects

1.2.2 Fuses






PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable manufacturers shall be Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens or General Electric.

2.2 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.1 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.

2.3 All switches shall be heavy-duty type, externally operated, quick-make, quick-break, rated 600 volts or 240 volts as required, with the number of poles and ampacity as noted. All switches for motors shall be HP rated. Switches shall have NEMA-Type 1 enclosures, except switches located where exposed to outdoor conditions shall have NEMA Type 3R enclosure. Switches generally shall be fused except where noted to be non-fused on the drawings.

2.4 Where fuses are indicated, fuses shall be Bussman or Littlefuse (no known equal). Fuses shall be current limiting type with time delay characteristics to suit the equipment served.


3.1 Mount all switches to structure or U-channel support. U-channel supports shall be cleaned and painted to prevent rust.

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College DISCONNECTS ©JCE #15079 26 28 16–2

3.2 Switches shall be accessible with proper clearances in front per CEC 110-16.

3.3 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.

3.4 Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

3.4.1 The contractor is to provide, and submit to the engineer for approval, incident energy level calculations as determined using the methodologies described in NFPA 70E or IEEE standard 1584-2002.

3.4.2 A warning label, as specified in the above standard, shall be placed on each switchboard, panelboard, and safety switch indicating the incident energy levels on the equipment to warn qualified personnel in accordance with NFPA 70E, section 110.16 Labels shall be laminated white micarta with black lettering on each. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.

3.4.3 The incident level calculations for each piece of equipment shall be given to the owner and maintained on file by the maintenance department.

3.4.4 The design goal is to minimize the incident energy to which a maintenance employee may be exposed and in no case more than 8 cal./cm².

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College TESTING ©JCE #15079 26 90 90-1

SECTION 26 90 90

TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Upon completion of the electrical work, the entire installation shall be tested by the Contractor, and demonstrated to be operating satisfactorily to the Architect, Engineer, Inspector and Owner.

1.2 All testing and corrections shall be made prior to demonstration of operation to the Architect, Engineer, Inspector and Owner.

1.3 In addition to the demonstration of operation, the Contractor is also required to review the content and quality of instructions provided on items demonstrated with the Architect, Engineer, Inspector and Owner.


2.1 Wiring shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and/or accidental grounds. All systems shall be entirely free from “grounds,” “short circuits,” and any or all defects.

2.2 Motors shall be operating in proper rotations, and control devices functioning properly. Check all motor controllers to determine that properly sized overload devices are installed, and all other electrical equipment for proper operation.

2.3 Tests and adjustments shall be made prior to acceptance of the electrical installation by the Architect, and a certificate of inspection and acceptance of the electrical installation by local inspection authorities shall be provided.

2.4 All equipment or wiring provided which tests prove to be defective or operating improperly shall be corrected or replaced promptly, at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.5 Test all motor and feeder circuits with a “megger” tester to determine that insulation values conform to Section 110-20, California Electrical Code (CED). Test reports must be submitted and approved by the engineer before final acceptance.

2.6 Test all grounding electrode connections to assure a resistance of no more than 10 ohms is achieved. Augment grounding until the ohmic value stated above is achieved. Provide certified test results to the Architect, Engineer and Inspector.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS ©JCE #15079 27 01 00–1

SECTION 27 01 00

COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE 1 - SUMMARY

1.1 This Division of the specifications outlines the provisions of the contract work to be performed as a sub contract under the Division 26 scope of work. Reference the Division 26 Electrical General Provisions for scope of work and general requirements.

1.2 In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding

requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under Division 1 requirements.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE ©JCE #15079 27 10 00–1

SECTION 27 10 00

VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Include all labor, equipment and materials necessary for providing a complete networking infrastructure system as described herein and/or as indicated on the drawings.

1.2 Related specification sections:

1.2.1 Section 26 01 00 - General Provisions. 1.2.2 Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Fittings. 1.2.3 Section 26 05 19 - Conductors. 1.2.4 Section 26 05 34 – Outlet and Junction Boxes.

1.3 Approved products and all components shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufactures, and the installing contractor must have the accompanying certification from the product manufacturer for installation of a “Warranted System: as required by each manufacturer and as indicated in these specifications. The Acceptable manufacturers are :

1.3.1 AMP Inc.

1.3.1.1 Installing contractor must be AMP ND&I certified to install this system.

1.3.2 KRONE

1.3.2.1 Installing contractor must be KRONE TSC certified to install this system.

1.3.3 Leviton / Superior Essex.

1.3.3.1 Installing contractor must be LEVITON CCS LEVEL III certified to install this system.

1.3.4 SYSTIMAX

1.3.4.1 Installing contractor must be SCS Systimax certified to install this system.

1.3.5 Systems or components as manufactured by Hitachi or any other manufacturer’s which are not specifically listed, are not approved for use on this project. Specified system warranties are to be established between the component manufacturers and the owner, warranties between the cable manufacturer or installing contractor and the owner are not considered equal.

1.3.6 Installing contractor qualifications: Firms and their personnel must be regularly engaged in the installation of data networking cabling and equipment for systems of similar type and scope. The contractor must have a full service office able to respond to emergency callouts during the warranty period. The contractor must also provide complete installation of all wiring and devices or equipment. Subcontracts with Division 26 contractors or other warranted or non-warranted contractors for supervised installation of any part of this system is not approved. All conduit and standard back boxes will be furnished and installed by the


Division 26 contractor. Specialty boxes will be furnished by the equipment supplier and installed by the Division 26 contractor.

1.3.7 Equipment qualifications: It is the intent of these specifications that each bidder provide all hardware, components and installation services that are necessary to ensure a fully operational Category-6 wiring system including warranties, proposed in the EIA/TIA Category-6 and the ISO Class E drafts.

1.3.8 Warranty shall be a full “Performance Warranty” ins talled by a “Certified Contractor” as specified by one of the approved man ufacturer’s A “Component Warranty” will not be considered equal. All components, labor, and 'Link Performance Criteria" shall be warranted by one of the approved manufacturers. Warranty shall be to the customer for 15-years (some warranty programs may be greater, this is a minimum requirement) after Customer acceptance and sign-off of the completed system. The contractor must provide documentation from one of the approved manufacturer s indicating their qualifications for installation of this system in c ompliance with the manufacturers warranty requirements as a warranted contractor.

1.4 In order to ensure project cohesion, a single point of contact is required to provide a “TURNKEY” solution. The work covered under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all labor; conduits, boxes and trenching; cabling; equipment; supplies; materials, and training. The Contractor will perform all operations necessary for the “TURNKEY” and fully completed installation in accordance with the specifications herein. As such, the successful contractor must be factory trained on all aspects of system hardware. The successful Contractor shall be a California licensed C7 or C10 premise wiring contractor as defined in this specification. Subcontractors may not be utilized in the implementation of the plant wiring installation or certification process. The contractor shall provide a licensed, qualified Division 26 contractor for installation of all conduits, outlet and junction boxes, trenching and pull box installations.

1.5 The drawings indicate a schematic routing of cables above ceilings. The Contractor shall field-verify the most appropriate routing of all above-ceiling cable prior to bid. Where cables penetrate through walls a conduit sleeve shall be provided. Where cables pass through fire rated walls, the conduit sleeve shall be sealed to maintain the rating of the wall assembly.

1.6 Phase I Submittal shall be made within (20) working days after the award of the contract by the District. This submittal shall include the following:

1.6.1 Complete bills of quantities, including all materials, components, devices, and equipment required for this work. The bills of quantities shall be tabulated respective of each and every system as specified, and shall contain the following information for each Section listed:

1.6.1.1 Description and quantity of each item. 1.6.1.2 Manufacturer's Name and Model Number. 1.6.1.3 Manufacturer's Specification Sheet.

1.6.2 Include with submittals all warranty information and a description of support and maintenance services to be provided. Also include all licenses and maintenance agreements required for continued operation of the equipment.

1.7 Phase II submittal shall be provided within (20) working days after the approval of the Phase I submittals and prior to any fabrication or field conduit installations. All shop


drawings shall be engineered and drawn on a CAD System. Each submission shall include 'D' or ’E’ size print copies to match the contract drawings, and (1) Phase II submittals drawings shall include the following.

1.7.1 MDF or IDF equipment or rack elevations will be required to be provided including, cable routing and position of all components.

1.7.2 Provide labeling plan which identifies the proposed scheme for identifying all components including Racks, patch panels (fiber and copper), ports and cables (fiber and copper).

1.8 Common submittal mistakes which will result in subm ittals being rejected:

1.8.1 Not including the qualifications of the installing contractor.





1.9 The contractor shall make a written request directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers for electronic drawing files. As a part of the written request, please include the following information:

1.9.1 Clearly indicate each drawing sheet needed (i.e., E1.1, E2.1, etc.).

1.9.2 Identify the name, phone number, mailing address and e-mail address of the person to receive the files.

1.9.3 Provide written confirmation and agreement with the requirements described for payment of computer files, as described below.

1.9.4 Detail or riser diagram sheets, or any other drawings other than floor plans or site plans, will not be made available to the contractor.

1.9.5 Files will only be provided in the AutoCAD format in which they were created (i.e., version 14 or version 2000i).

1.9.6 Requests for files will be processed as soon as possible; a minimum of 7 working days should be the normal processing time. The contractor shall be completely responsible for requesting the files in time for their use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Equipment racks have been detailed on the drawings and additional component information requirements have been described in the IDF products sections. The following is a list of approved manufacturers for each type of rack system.


2.1.1 Alternate equipment manufacturers other than those indicated will not be reviewed or approved for use on this project.

2.1.2 (Enclosed Wall Mount) shall be manufactured by B-Line or Middle Atlantic. Reference drawing details and specification for complete requirements.

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

2.2 The Intermediate Distribution Frame shall be a secondary wiring and equipment location for the data networking system. The contractor shall include the following items at this location.

2.2.1 Provide 8'-0" high x 3/4" thick, as detailed on drawings, flame resistant plywood mounting backboard, painted with fire resistant paint white or color to match. Contractor shall provide minimum one side finish grade plywood. Backboard shall be mounted with finish side out, regardless of location of fire rating stamp.

2.2.2 Fiber optic termination equipment (rack mounted), including all associated installation hardware for fiber feed cables. The equipment must have sufficient number of ports to connect all fibers in every cable terminated at this location.

2.2.3 Category-6 Modular Patch Panel Owner furnished and installed.

2.2.4 Fiber optic termination equipment (rack mounted), including all associated installation hardware for fiber optic connections for the telephone switch remote node.

2.2.5 Provide equipment mounting rack or enclosure as detailed in the drawings. Provide ladder rack bracing at top of rack back to wall and seismic bolting to floor and wall as shown on detail drawings. Rack shall be furnished with the following accessories:

2.2.5.1 (1) Grounding kit, connect grounding conductor to nearest ground buss bar.

2.2.5.2 Provide full length double-sided vertical wire managers, on each side of each rack section, or between racks, and horizontal wire managers between each patch panel. In wall-mounted cabinets, provide combination vertical/horizontal managers with vertical rings. Managers for wall-mounted cabinets shall be no more than 1RU in height and rings no more than 2" in depth. Provide (4) spare horizontal managers per rack section.

2.2.5.3 (1) Rack mounted surge arrest style power strip “APC” # NET9RM with (9) outlets and (1) always on outlet, guarded master on-off switch. Provide with minimum 15-foot cord.

2.2.6 Additional items required at each IDF closet are as follows:

2.2.6.1 Fiber patch cords shall be provided and connected to the electronics by others.

2.3 Campus Indoor/Outdoor Fiber Optic Feed Cable


2.3.1 Provide one continuous fiber optic cable routed from the Main Distribution Frame fiber patch panel to each Intermediate Distribution Frame fiber patch panel, and/or other locations as shown on the drawings.

2.3.2 Fiber optic cable shall be rated for indoor/outdoor applications. Construction shall consist of; all dielectric, stranded loose tube with central strength member, no more than six strands per tube, flame retardant PVC or PE jacket, rated OFNR, water blocking gel in tubes or dry water-blocking compound, and blank fillers as required. Central tube type fiber will not be considered equal.

2.3.3 Fiber optic feeds shown as composite type may be run as separately jacketed cables. Cables shown as separate runs on the drawings may not be combined together.

2.3.4 Cable shall contain one or all types of fibers listed below:

2.3.4.1 Multimode 50/125 micron strands, minimum (laser-optimized grade) for dual mode operation at 850 nm and 1300 nm wave lengths. Maximum attenuation at 3.5dB/km @ 850nm and 1.5dB/km @ 1300nm. Quantity of fibers as per detail drawings. Minimum gigabit ethernet distance guarantee of 900 meters @ 850nm and 550 meters @ 13 00nm. Minimum 10 gigabit ethernet distance guarantee of 3 00 meters @ 850nm. Aerial rated

2.3.4.2 Single mode 8.3/125 micron strands, minimum High Performance grade for dual mode operation at 1310 nm and 1550 nm wave lengths. Maximum attenuation at 0.5dB/km @ 1310nm and 0.5dB/km @ 1550nm. Quantity of fibers as per detail drawings. Aerial rated

2.3.4.3 Refer to drawings for cable types required. Refer to acceptable cables section for additional information and approved manufacturers.

2.3.5 Each fiber optic cable shall contain the quantity of strands of optical fibers as detailed on the drawings. A pull string shall be placed with all fiber cable at the time of installation. Outdoor rated fiber runs in excess of 150 feet shall be provided with a minimum 1/4" pull rope for futur e access. An empty and spare site conduits shall be provided with minimum 1/4" pull rope.

2.3.6 All fibers in a multi-fiber cable shall be fully operational within the required performance characteristics. If any individual fiber does not meet the minimum standards, the entire cable must be replaced, end to end, including connectors, without any additional expense to the customer.

2.3.7 Acceptable cables shall be:

AMP Inc. — OM4 series Corning — OM4 series

Krone — OM4 series Superior Essex — OM4 series

Above glass types are an example of product names p er manufacturer. Confirm requirements for indoor/outdoor fiber cable with riser drawings and site plans. Part numbers for composite style cable will vary greatly. Confirm part numbers with manufacturer.


2.3.8 All indoor rated fiber shall be installed in riser rated innerduct, when not installed in conduit, a minimum of 1" in diameter. A pull string shall be placed with all fiber cable at the time of installation. Indoor rated fiber runs in excess of 150 feet shall be provided with a minimum 1/4" pull rope for future access upon completion of the project. An empty and spare site conduits shall be provided with minimum 1/4" pull rope .

2.3.9 All fibers in a multi-fiber cable shall be fully operational within the required performance characteristics. If any individual fiber does not meet the minimum standards, the entire cable must be replaced, end to end, including connectors, without any additional expense to the customer.

2.3.10 Acceptable cables shall be:

AMP Inc. — # XG 50/125 Series Avaya — # Laser Speed 300 Berk-Tek — # GIGALITE 10 Uniprise — # Laser Core 300, Type 5L Corning — # INFINICOR SXT Krone — # 50/125Ultra Mode Mohawk — # Advanced Lite 2000 NORDX/CDT — # M9C811 Series Superior Essex — # TERAGAIN 10G

Above glass types are an example of product names p er manufacturer. Confirm requirements for indoor fiber cable with ri ser drawings and site plans. Part numbers for composite style cable will vary greatly. Confirm part numbers with manufacturer.

2.4 Data Station Cable

2.4.1 All building UTP cabling will be owner furnished and installed

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 Pull strings will be provided with all cable runs i ncluding but not limited to; conduit stub ups, conduit sleeves, cable trays, open wiring routes, innerduct, and point-to-point conduits. Pull strings shall be free from cab le bundles in open wiring routes. Pull strings shall not be substituted for pull ropes.

3.2 Velcro cable management straps are required on the rear of the equipment racks and on the patch cords within the vertical cable managers. Straps shall be a maximum of 12" apart.

3.3 Every fiber in every fiber optic cable must be terminated at both ends on a fiber patch panel in the IDF closet or on a faceplate in the classroom location. Termination shall be accomplished using Duplex SC type connectors with a long strain relief boot, except for fiber ran to station locations where a short boot shall be used.

3.4 All SC connectors shall be of the same manufacture to ensure compatibility. Polarity of fiber strands must be observed at all times.

3.5 Labeling


3.5.1 Each cable run shall be permanently labeled at each end with a unique sequential number which corresponds to a similar number provided for each data outlet and punch down point. A printed label shall be placed at each of the following locations;

3.5.1.1 On the cable at the rear of the patch panel or termination block. Requires the use of a self laminating wrap around label. Brady Label self laminating 1.2" by 1.5" wrap around label Part # 29689 or equal.

3.5.1.2 On each cable in the j-box behind the faceplate location. Requires the use of a self laminating wrap around label. Brady Label self laminating 1.2" by 1.5" wrap around label Part # 29689 or equal.

3.5.1.3 On the face of the patch panel, provide a 3/4" by 3/4" label with a letter or number identifying the patch panel designation.

3.5.1.4 On the face of the faceplate in the label holder window.

3.5.2 Hand written labels are not permitted. Where cable ID includes room number identification the contractor shall obtain written verification of actual room numbers prior to beginning labeling (numbers on plans do not always match actual room numbers). Cable pulling cross reference lists will not be accepted with final documentation.

3.5.3 Each patch panel port shall be identified with a unique sequential labeling scheme. Port identification labeling pattern shall be consistent throughout the project.

3.5.4 All faceplates shall be identified with permanent printed labels. Labels must not be subject to removal by incidental contact. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing defective labeling for a period of on e year from date of final sign-off of project.

3.5.5 All fiber optic feed cables shall be identified with a permanent, water resistant, printed labels. Labeling information shall include closet identifications, quantity of conductors (UTP) or strands (fiber) and house pair designations (UTP).

3.5.6 Labeling will follow recommended EIA/TIA standards or as requested by the customer. Contractor will confirm labeling pattern prior to final identification or testing. All test results will be identified by the final la beling scheme.

3.5.7 All fiber optic cables and/or innerduct shall be tagged with fiber optic warning tags in every manhole or pullbox. Fiber warning tags shall also be placed at each end of the cable in the termination closets in clear view. A minimum of (3) tags are required at each end. Fiber warning tags shall be placed on fiber optic cable and/or innerduct routed through open ceiling environments at increments no less than 15 feet apart.

3.6 Where open wiring cables are run through the ceiling space (only permitted where specifically noted on the drawings), the wire shall be bundled together and supported above the ceiling.

3.7 All cables must be fastened to the building structure via “j-hooks” or an approved Category 6 suspension system, and not directly in contact with ceiling system. For “j-


hooks” maximum fill capacity is as follows: 1-5/16" hooks – 35 cables; 2" hooks - 60 cables; 4" hooks - 120 cables. For quantities beyond 120 cables use a sling support system such as “Erico Cable Cat” or equal. Maximum fill capacity 200 cables. D-rings, “Caddy #WMX cable hangar”, “Caddy Bridle Rings”, dr ive rings or any other type of wire ring support is not allowed.

3.8 Where cables pass through a fire-resistant portion of the structure, conduit sleeves shall be provided to maintain the rating of the wall penetrated. Sealing of all penetrations with an approved fire barrier is required. Conduits and sleeves must remain accessible for future use. Permanent sealants may not be used to seal sleeves and conduits.

3.9 Fiber optic cables connecting to equipment racks shall be installed with not less than 20 feet of slack cable between the rack and the terminal backboard. See drawings for fiber optic service loop requirements.

3.10 The minimum bending radius for all cables and the maximum pulling tension shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.

3.11 Cables installed in manholes and pullboxes on terminal backboards shall be installed on wall mounted cable support racks.

3.12 Provide a full 360 degree loop of cable around manhole and pullbox interiors.

3.13 Cable pulling shall use a split mesh grip over the cable jacket. Connection directly to optical fibers and copper wire conductors shall not occur.

3.14 When pulled through conduits, cable pulling lubricants shall be continuously applied to all cables and be specifically approved by the manufacturer.

3.15 Where cables are pulled through or pulled from a center of run, pull without splices or terminations, lead out the cables at all manholes, pullboxes, and conduits, taking care to feed them in again by hand for the next run.

3.16 For each cable pull where a cable direction change is required, flexible feed-in tubes, pullout devices, multi-segmented sheaves, etc., shall be used to ensure proper cable pulling tensions and side wall pressures. Cables shall not be pulled directly around a short right angle bend. Any device or surface the cable comes in contact with when under pull-in tension shall have a minimum radius 50% greater than the final specified minimum installed cable bending radius. The maximum possible size radius sheaves and feed-in tubes, usable in the available working space, shall be provided in all situations, to ensure the minimum possible cable sidewall pulling pressure. Do not use devices with multi-segment "roller" type sheaves.

3.17 When pulling cable through conduit, cables shall be pulled straight into or out of the raceway without bends at the raceway entrance or exit. Pull in cable from the end having the sharpest bend (i.e., bend shall be closest to the reel.) Keep pulling tension to minimum by liberal use of lubricant, hand turning of reel, and slack feeding of cable into duct entrance. Employ not less than one man at reel and one at manhole or pullbox during this operation. Cables shall be pulled directly from cable reels.

3.18 All cables shall be new and extend continuous from each MDF or IDF backboard or rack to all voice/data outlets or other equipment locations.


3.19 Where cables are not installed in a conduit or other raceway system, they shall not be routed parallel with other line voltage equipment or wiring (120 volt and above) within 36" or within 12" of line voltage equipment or wiring where crossing. Where Flooded Enhanced Category-5 cables or outdoor rated fiber optic cables are routed exposed through ceilings for more than 50'-0", install in innerduct or EMT conduit system.

PART 4 - TESTING

4.1 Multimode fiber optic cables shall be tested bi-directionally at 850nm and 1300nm. Single mode fiber optic cable shall be tested bi-directionally at 1310nm and 1550nm. All fiber strands shall be tested with a power meter and light source as well as an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer). OTDR fiber tests for runs under 100 meters are not required. All fiber test results shall contain final source and destination information that matches IDF or MDF labeling shown on drawings. Fiber test results shall be submitted as hard copy and on floppy disk in Microsoft Excel format.

4.2 Test procedures shall comply with EIA/TIA 526-14 Method B. Test results shall meet the minimum following criteria:

4.2.1 Fiber optic test results shall not exceed 2db attenuation loss in addition to inherent loss published by manufacturer tested at minimum 2000 Mhz for 850nm and 500 Mhz for 1300nm for the fiber optic cable.

4.2.2 Test all voice/data cables minimum Category-6 UTP cable to test results for “Link Testing” requirements @ 250 Mhz per current EIA/TIA draft requirements. Any cables which do not meet these minimum requirements shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to the customer.

4.3 End to end attenuation termination points measure the power loss between end points from both directions.

4.4 End to end attenuation testing shall be performed with a temporary test jumper cable at each end of the installed fiber cable. The test jumper shall be the same size as the installed cable. The measured attenuation of the test jumpers, test connectors, and test interconnection sleeve between the two test jumpers shall be less than 1dB as calibrated at the time of the test at indicated wave lengths and frequencies.

4.5 Provide (3) hard bound copies of “E-size” drawings and (1) disk copy in AutoCAD 14 or 2000 format copy of floor plan drawings of each building. These drawings shall include all outlet locations, major cable routes and outlet and cable identification numbers. Provide detailed elevations of each MDF or IDF locating all equipment and connections.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS ©JCE #15079 28 01 00–1

SECTION 28 01 00

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE 1 - SUMMARY

1.1 This Division of the specifications outlines the provisions of the contract work to be performed as a sub contract under the Division 26 scope of work. Reference the Division 26 Electrical General Provisions for scope of work and general requirements.

1.2 In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding

requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under Division 1 requirements.

END OF SECTION

Grossmont District Auxiliary Office Grossmont College FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ©JCE #15079 28 30 00–1

SECTION 28 30 00

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Work Included:

1.1.1 Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating fire alarm system.

1.2 Related Work:

1.2.1 Division 26 01 00: Electrical General Provisions 1.2.2 Division 26 05 33: Conduit and Fittings 1.2.3 Division 26 05 34: Outlet and Junction Boxes

1.3 The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards:

NFPA 72-2013. . . . . . . National Fire Alarm Code with California Amendments. CBC - 2013. . . . . . . . . . California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24, CCR. CEC - 2013. . . . . . . . . . California Electrical Code, (CEC), Part 3, Title 24, CCR. CFC - 2013. . . . . . . . . . California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR.

1.4 The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable:

UL 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. UL 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinets and Boxes. UL 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268A . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audible Signaling Appliances. UL 521. . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 864 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1481. . . . . . . . . . . . Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1971. . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Signaling Appliances.

1.5 Only Fire Alarm Control Panel Equipment and Peripheral Field Devices have been shown on the Contract Bid Single Line Block Diagram. Specific and complete wiring between Control Equipment and Peripheral Equipment has been deleted for clarity.

1.6 Submittal shall be made in accordance with Division 26 01 00 – Shop Drawing s and Submittals. This submittal shall include the following:

1.6.1 Complete bills of quantities, including all materials, components, devices, and equipment required for this work. The bills of quantities shall be tabulated respective of each and every system as specified, and shall contain the following information for each item listed:


1.6.1.1 Quantity of each type of equipment item. 1.6.1.2 Description of each item. 1.6.1.3 Manufacturer's Name and Model Number. 1.6.1.4 Manufacturer's Specification Sheet. 1.6.1.5 California State Fire Marshall Listing Sheets for all components. 1.6.1.6 Equipment items which have individual components, will require that

all component parts be listed individually. 1.6.1.7 Letter indicating the contractor’s intent to comply with Phase II

submittal drawings.

1.7 Phase II Submittal shall be provided within (20) working days after the approval of the Phase I submittals and prior to any fabrication or field conduit installations. All shop drawings shall be engineered and drawn on a CAD System. Each submission shall include 'D' or ’E’ size print copies to match the contract drawings, and one (1) data disk copy with files in a AutoCAD 2000i or 2004 format . Contractor shall make the request for drawings in writing directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers, confirmation of the request and a release form will be forwarded to the contractor to include a signed copy with payment prior to release of files. Detail or riser diagram sheets or any other drawings other than floor or site plans, will not be made available to the contractor.

1.7.1 Provide complete shop drawings to include the follo wing:

1.7.1.1 Complete floor plans, at scale of contract documents, showing the locations throughout the project of all receptacles, conduits, wireways, tray, pullboxes, junction boxes, equipment racks, and other devices.

1.7.1.2 Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from panel terminals to each device.

1.7.1.3 Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices, conduit runs, types, and number of conductors.

1.7.1.4 Riser diagram indicating all wiring and circuits.

1.7.1.5 Current State Fire Marshal listing sheets for all components and devices.

1.7.1.6 Provide battery power supply calculations, indicate point of power supply connection, means of disconnect, over-current protection, etc. for each panel.

1.7.1.7 Provide detailed information on conductors to be used-manufacturer, type, size, insulation, etc.

1.7.1.8 Provide voltage drop calculations for all conductor run is from each panel (i.e., main FACP, remotes, power extenders, etc.) for each panel.

1.7.1.9 Provide written sequence of system operation matrix.

1.7.1.10 Provide list of zones. (Every device that is addressable.)


1.7.1.11 Provide detailed drawing for annunciator panel indicating all zones and initiating devices.

1.8 Common submittal mistakes which will result in subm ittals being rejected:

1.8.1 Not including the qualifications of the installing contractor.





1.9 All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation. Drawings shall be equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and UL listed as compatible by both manufacturers.

1.10 It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure proper specification adherence for system operation, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and after-market service. The distributor of the equipment specified must be factory-trained and certified.

1.11 Basic System Functional Operation, upon operation of any automatic, manual or other initiation device the following shall occur:

1.11.1 The system alarm LED shall flash.

1.11.2 A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.

1.11.3 A backlit 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the alarm point and its location within the protected premises.

1.11.4 History storage equipment shall log the information associated with each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.

1.11.5 All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.

1.11.6 LED display and audible signaling at the remote annunciator indicating building, fire zone, and type of device.

1.11.7 Automatic retransmission to a UL central station for fire department notification.


1.11.8 Automatic shut down of air conditioning units and/or smoke dampers furnished with duct detectors. Each building shall shut down all A/C units and dampers within that building as one zone.

1.12 All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approval agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the NFPA 72, 2013 Edition with California State Amendments.

1.13 All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

1.14 All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

1.15 All wiring shall be installed in a conduit system.

1.16 The contractor shall provide as a part of this contract additional control modules, heat detectors, smoke detectors, duct detectors, manual pull stations, strobes, mini-horns and exterior horn devices etc., to equal 10% of the total quantity of devices shown on the drawings, or a minimum of three (3) for each type, whichever is greater. Installation of conduit, boxes and wiring of these devices shall be included, and required locations coordinated with CSFM final approved shop drawings. Any devices not required to be included during construction shall be delivered to the District at the completion of the project. The quantities of these devices shall be listed as a part of the Phase I submittals.

1.17 The installing contractor shall provide a copy of current documentation, indicating that the contractor installing the fire alarm systems or devices and wiring, is certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in its product directories under the listing category "PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SERVICES - LOCAL, AUXILIARY, REMOTE STATION, AND PROPRIETARY.” The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to install and program the system. The contractor must also provide complete installation of all wiring and equipment, and software programming. Supervised installation of the wiring, devices and/or any software programming shall not be permitted.

1.17.1 The installing contractor must also be an “authorized dealer” by the equipment manufacturer, and must have completed all required training prior to the bid of this project.

1.17.2 The fire alarm system installation shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s representative.

1.17.3 The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 or C-7 Contractor’s License, and all individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of Industrial Relations Division of Apprenticeship Standards – “Fire / Life Safety Certification Program.”

1.17.4 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter of intent to provide an extended service warranty. This warranty shall extend for a total of three (3) years, starting at the completion, testing, and training of this project. The service warranty shall cover all material and labor to keep operational all system devices installed under this project, and shall include two (2) complete


U.L. system’s tests and cleaning of all devices at year two (2) and year three (3) of the warranty. Routine cleaning of devices, other than at the two (2) specified U.L. system’s testing periods, will not be included as a part of this warranty.

1.17.5 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter indicating that the installation crew for this project meets the following NICET certifications:

1.17.5.1 25% of the installing field personnel must have completed NICET Level 2 Certification.

1.17.5.2 One of the installing field personnel and /or supervisor must have completed NICET Level 3 Certification.

1.17.5.3 Contractor shop drawings shall be signed by an individual who has completed NICET Level 4 Certification.

1.18 All conduit and standard backboxes will be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor. Specialty boxes will be furnished by the equipment supplier to be installed by the Division 26 Contractor.

1.19 Equipment and materials shall be the standard product of Simplex to match the existing system

Alternate equipment as manufactured by any other manufacturer not specifically listed above will not be approved for use on this project. D.S.A approved drawings are included as a part of the drawing set

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Main Fire Alarm Control Panel

2.1.1 Fire alarm control panel Simplex

2.1.2 The system shall be controlled and supervised by a microprocessor based monitoring fire alarm control panel. The systems shall be addressable, field configurable, programmable and editable. The system shall continuously scan devices for change of status. Each device shall have its own unique address, but shall also be grouped by building as a separate zone for remote annunciation and alarm report purposes.

2.1.3 The system shall be provided with a networking card and software and modem to communicate with the District-wide diagnostic and annunciation network.

2.1.4 The fire alarm control panel shall be housed in a lockable, code gauge steel cabinet with 80 character LCD display, master controller operators panel, Indicating lamps, silence switch and reset switch mounted on cabinet front. The fire alarm control panel shall be physically and visually located in the general office for monitoring by staff, and shall sound the “Temporal Pattern” in all zones. Signal duration shall be field programmable and initially set at three minutes. Provide all control modules, synchronous modules, etc., to provide a complete working system per all codes that apply.


2.1.5 The fire alarm control panel shall come with standardized software for on-site customization of the system. The unit shall be capable of providing a 600-event historical log with zone or point selectable alarm verification.

2.1.6 The unit shall support 127 addressable points per module and one output point, SPST contact per zone. Provide the number of modules necessary to control and supervise fire alarm devices as shown on the Drawings, as well as to provide 25% spare capacity.

2.1.7 The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of providing a walk test.

2.2 The power feed for the FACP shall be 3-wire, 120volt, AC, single phase (20A circuit) permanently labeled “FIRE ALARM CONTROL POWER”, terminating at the master fire alarm control and supervisory panel. The label shall be red with 1/4” high white lettering. The source circuit breaker must be provided with a lock-on device.

2.3 In addition to the AC circuit, the panel shall be equipped with a DC battery to activate an audible alarm and pilot light in case of a power failure on the AC circuit.

2.4 Batteries must drive signaling devices per current requirements of California State Fire Marshal. Battery calculations are required as part of the submittal.

2.5 The master fire alarm panel shall be equipped with a manual pull lever type, supervised report station.

2.6 With the exception of the manually operated report station required at the master fire alarm panel and large assembly areas, the remainder of the school facility shall be equipped with approved, electronically supervised, automatic fire detection devices, such that every room, space, including concealed spaces, such as the attic spaces above ceilings, etc., is provided with approved coverage.

2.7 Automatic fire detection devices shall be addressable analog smoke and heat detectors. Where used, heat detectors shall be fixed temperature x-rate of rise, fixed at 135ΕF and a 15ΕF/min rate of rise. In janitor rooms equipped with kilns, devices shall be fixed at 170ΕF.

2.8 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS shall be addressable test-reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal, except by use of a key. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed of die-formed, satin-finished aluminum, with operating directions provided on the cover in depressed red letters. The word FIRE shall appear on each side of the stations in depressed letters, 1/2-inch in size or larger. Stations shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang box or switch plate, and shall be provided with a terminal block for connection of fire alarm system wiring. Manual pull stations must comply with CBC sections 11B-309 and 11B-403.

2.9 HORN / STROBE DEVICE shall be of the semi-flush type designed for mounting to a standard four-inch square electrical outlet box. Each device shall be provided with a semi-flush accessory plate. Exterior horns shall be weatherproof. The strobe unit shall have a meantime between failure (MTBF) of 1,000 hours or greater. The strobe section shall have a minimum flash rate of approximately one flash per second, with candela rating as per UL standard 1971. Housing shall be white.


2.9.1 In areas containing two or more audible devices, or three or more visual devices, these devices shall be synchronized, Per NFPA 72, Chapter 6 California Amendments (2013).

2.10 STROBES. The strobe unit shall have a meantime between failure (MTBF) of 1,000 hours or greater. The strobe section shall have a minimum flash rate of approximately one flash per second, with candela rating as per UL standard 1971. Housing shall be white.

2.10.1 In areas containing two or more audible devices, or three or more visual devices, these devices shall be synchronized, per NFPA 72, Chapter 6 California Amendments (2013).

2.10.2 Maximum pulse duration to be 0.20 of a second with an ADAAG 4.28.3(3). Visual alarms maximum duty cycle of 40%.

2.10.3 Capable of providing minimum candela. Intensity as shown on plans (effective strength measured at the source).

2.10.4 The flash rate to be a minimum of 1.Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz.

2.11 HEAT DETECTOR DEVICES shall be addressable, fixed temperature x rate of rise, fixed at 135ΕF and a 15ΕF/min rate of rise. In janitor rooms equipped with kilns, devices shall be fixed at 170ΕF.

2.12 SMOKE DETECTOR DEVICES shall be analog addressable, photo-electric.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 All wiring shall be (min) #18 AWG copper or as noted on drawings. All underground conductors shall be UL wet location rated for use in wet locations, West Penn “Aquaseal” or equal. There shall be no splices in underground handholes or vaults. A multi-conductor cable rated for use in wet locations will also be acceptable. It must be labeled “FIRE ALARM” in all pull boxes, using a water-tight labeling system.

3.2 Interior, dry location wiring for low voltage initiating circuits shall be #18 AWG copper, twisted shielded pair minimum, signaling circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum, and wiring for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color coded, solid copper conductor. Use of power limited cable shall be restricted to controls listed for this purpose. Single conductors shall be type THHN/THWN-2 insulated copper.

3.3 Wire markers shall be provided for each wire connected to equipment. The marker shall be of the taped bank type, of permanent material, and shall be suitable and permanently stamped with the proper identification. The markers shall be attached in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Changing of wire colors within circuits shall be unacceptable.

3.4 A terminal cabinet shall be installed in the electric room for the fire alarm systems at each building. All fire alarm wiring shall terminate on UL approved strips in this terminal cabinet. All wiring shall be labeled at each termination strip. Wiring shall be configured such that all end-of-line resistors will be installed at the terminal cabinet.

3.5 Fire Sprinkler Activation detecting System(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone in the fire alarm control panel.


3.6 Fire Alarm Control Panel and all other equipment shall be mounted with the center of all operable reset buttons, located a maximum of 48" front approach / 54" side approach above floor level.

3.7 Contractor shall provide complete wiring between all equipment.

3.8 The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) DSA.

3.9 The Fire Alarm Control Panel and power supply shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main Power Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT.

3.10 The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to a power system ground conductor. Provide a 1/2-inch conduit and 1#12 grounding conductor to the building electrical service ground bus.

3.11 Conduit shall enter into the Fire alarm Control Panel back box only at those areas of the back box which have factory conduit knockouts.

3.12 All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.

3.13 All cables and wiring shall be listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use, and shall be of the type as required by and installed per CEC Article 760.

3.14 Final System Acceptance

3.14.1 Provide an NFPA Certificate of Compliance to DSA, the School District and Local Fire Marshall. Complete fire alarm system shall comply with and be sound-tested for a “Temporal Pattern” in all zones.

3.14.2 Beam detectors shall be tested by two methods:

3.14.2.1 Manual slow cover test to confirm reflector alignment is correct.

3.14.2.2 Software fire test per UL268.5 to demonstrate when signal level is reduced simulating obstruction the detector will go into alarm.

3.14.3 The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a Factory-Trained Distributor in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative. This contractor shall provide all personnel, ladders and testing equipment to assist the local authority in completing this test. Actuate each device and verify that the system performs as specified.

3.14.4 The Contractor will present a complete set of "as-built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manuals as required by the General Provisions section of this specification.

END OF SECTION

Features

TrueAlarm® analog sensing provides: • Digital transmission of analog sensor values via

IDNet™ or MAPNET II® two-wire communications** For use with the following Simplex® products: • 4010 and 4100U Series control panels; and 4008 Series

control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data sheet S4008-0001 for details)

• 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal Transponders and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped for MAPNET II operation

Fire alarm control panel provides: • Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each

sensor for individual sensitivity selection • Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72® sensitivity

testing requirements; automatic individual sensor calibration check verifies sensor integrity

• Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot

• Ability to display and print detailed sensor information in plain English language

Photoelectric smoke sensors provide: • Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7% Heat sensors provide: • Fixed temperature sensing • Rate-of-rise temperature sensing • Utility temperature sensing Ionization smoke sensors provide: • Three levels of sensitivity; 0.5%, 0.9%, and 1.3% General features: • UL listed to Standard 268 • Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke

capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas are minimally visible when ceiling mounted

• Designed for EMI compatibility • Magnetic test feature is provided • Optional accessories include remote LED alarm

indicator and output relays Additional base reference: • For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0025 • For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0028 • For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S4098-0024

(single address) and S4098-0033 (dual address) * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to

Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings 7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster.

4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric Sensor Mounted in Base

Description Digital Communication of Analog Sensing. TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog measurement digitally communicated to the host control panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal condition is determined by comparing the sensor’s present value against its average value and time. Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s average value provides a continuously shifting reference point. This software filtering process compensates for environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either up or down. Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as the individual application requires. Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive during day). Control panel programming can also provide multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2% level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a 2.5% level may initiate an alarm.

Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor base’s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors. ** TrueAlarm analog sensors are protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:

5,155,468; 5,173,683; 5,400,014; 5,543,777; 5,710,541; D383,407; D388,352; D392,573. MAPNET II and IDNet addressable communications designs are protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,796,025.

TrueAlarm® Analog Sensing

UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric, MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Ionization, and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories

S4098-0019-12 8/2008

Sensor Base Features

Base mounted address selection: • Address remains with its programmed location • Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor) General features: • Automatic identification provides default sensitivity

when substituting sensor types • Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or

trouble (steady on) • Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet

box • Magnetically operated functional test

Sensor Bases

4098-9792, Standard sensor base 4098-9789, Sensor base with wired connections for: • 2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822

relay (unsupervised) 4098-9791, Sensor base with supervised relay driver output (not compatible with 2120 CDT): • Relay operation is programmable and can be manually

operated from control panel • Use with remote mount 2098-9737 relay • Also includes wired connections for remote LED alarm

indicator or 4098-9822 relay

Sensor Base Options

2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay: • DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power

limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC coil power)

4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay: • Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local

alarm or trouble • DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power

limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC coil power)

4098-9832, Adapter plate: • Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to

4” square electrical box and for surface mounting to 4” octagonal box

• Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8” diameter base product

2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm Indicator: • Mounts on single gang box

(shown in illustration to right)

Description

TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable electronics that constantly monitor the status of the detachable photoelectric, ionization, or heat sensors. Each sensor’s output is digitized and transmitted to the system fire alarm control panel every four seconds.

Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. This feature also allows intentional sensor substitution during building construction. When conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be installed without reprogramming the control panel. Although the control panel will indicate an incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a default sensitivity providing heat detection for building protection at that location.

Mounting Reference

Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;single gang, 2" deepWith relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,with 1-1/2" extension ring

TrueAlarm Bases4098-9789, -9791, & -9792

4-7/8" (124 mm)

15/16"(24 mm)

6-3/8" (162 mm)

1/4"(6.4 mm)

4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required formounting to surface mounted boxes

and 4" square flush box

Surface mount reference4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box

Flush mount reference, mount even with finalsurface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess

2098-9737 Relay (mounts inbase electrical box or remotely)

4098-9822 Relay (mountsin base electrical box)

Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches)(64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)

NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessoriesbeing wired to determine required box volume.

1-1/2" (38 mm)minimum box depth

2 S4098-0019-12 8/2008

TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories

ALARM

TrueAlarm Sensors Features

Sealed against rear air flow entry Interchangeable mounting EMI/RFI shielded electronics Heat sensors: • Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature

sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation • Rated spacing distance between sensors:

Fixed Temp. Setting

UL & ULC Spacing

FM Spacing, Either Fixed Temperature Setting

135° F (57.2° C)

60 ft x 60 ft (18.3 m)

155° F (68° C)

40 ft x 40 ft (12.2 m)

20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed temperature only; RTI = Quick 50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed temperature with either rate-of-rise selection; RTI = Ultra Fast

Smoke Sensors: • Photoelectric or ionization technology sensing • 360° smoke entry for optimum response • Built-in insect screens

4098-9733 Heat Sensor

TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel. Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C) per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at 135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed temperature setting. TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. Refer to specific panels for availability.

2-3/8"(60 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)

LED status indicator

4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base

WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly recommended.

4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor

TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel. The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.

2-1/8"(54 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)


4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base

4098-9717 Ionization Sensor

TrueAlarm Ionization sensors use a single radioactive source with an outer sampling ionization chamber and an inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity. Smoke and invisible combustion gases can freely penetrate the outer chamber. With both chambers ionized by a small radioactive source [Am 241 (Americium)], a very small current flows in the circuit. The presence of particles of combustion will cause a change in the voltage ratio between chambers. This difference is measured by the electronics in the sensor base and digitally transmitted back to the control panel for processing. Three levels of sensitivity are available for each ionization sensor: 0.5, 0.9, and 1.3% per foot of smoke obscuration.

2-1/8"(54 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)


4098-9717 Ionization Sensor with Base

Application Reference

Sensor locations should be determined only after careful consideration of the physical layout and contents of the area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code®. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual (574-709).

3 S4098-0019-12 8/2008

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Arrow

TrueAlarm Sensor Bases* Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

4098-9792 Standard Sensor Base, no options Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” min. depth; or single gang box, 2” min. depth

Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 4098-9789

Sensor Base with connections for Remote LED Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay

2098-9808 remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 2098-9737 remote relay (supervised) 4098-9791

Sensor Base with connections for Supervised Remote Relay and connections for Remote Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay

2098-9808 remote alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay (unsupervised)

4” octagonal or 4” square box

Note: Box depth requirements depend on total wire count and wire size, refer to accessories list below for reference.

TrueAlarm Sensors Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

4098-9714 Photoelectric Smoke Sensor 4098-9717 Ionization Smoke Sensor 4098-9733 Heat Sensor

Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789, and 4098-9791 Refer to base requirements

TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

2098-9737 Supervised Relay, mounts remote or in base electrical box For use with 4098-9791 base

Remote Mounting requires 4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth Base Mounting requires 4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring

2098-9808 Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate Single gang box, 1-1/2” minimum depth

4098-9822 Relay, tracks base LED status (unsupervised, mounts only in base electrical box)

Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring

4098-9832 Adapter Plate Bases 4098-9792, -9789, & -9791 Required for surface or semi-flush mounted 4” square box and for surface mounted 4” octagonal box

* Refer to Installation Instructions 574-707 and Application Manual 574-709 for additional information.

Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GMBH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, TrueAlarm, IDNet, and MAPNET II are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Tyco Safety Products Westminster • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA S4098-0019-12 8/2008

www.tycosafetyproducts-usa-wm.com © 2008 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

General Operating Specifications

Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, 24-40 VDC w/data, 400 μA typical, 1 address per base

Communications Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm2 to 2.08 mm2) Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current 1 mA typical, no impact to alarm current Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) UL Listed Temperature Range 32° to 100° F (0° to 38° C)

with 4098-9717 or 4098 -9733 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C) Operating Temperature Range with 4098-9714 15° to 122° F (-9° to 50° C)

Humidity Range 10 to 95% RH

4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor Air velocity = 0-2000 ft/min (0-610 m/min) Smoke Sensor Ambient Ratings 4098-9717, Ionization Sensor Air velocity = 0-200 ft/min (0-61 m/min); Altitude is up to 8000 ft (2.4 km)

Housing Color Frost White 4098-9791 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 2098-9737 (see page 2 for contact ratings)

Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage 18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current 270 μA, from 24 VDC supply Alarm Current with 2098-9737 Relay 28 mA, from 24 VDC supply

4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 (see page 2 for contact ratings) Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage 18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current Supplied from communications Alarm Current 13 mA from separate 24 VDC supply

TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart

Specifications

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION

OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL

FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM

LISTING SERVICE

LISTING No. 7272-0026:0218 Page 1 of 1

CATEGORY: 7272 -- SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC

LISTEE: Simplex100 Simplex Drive, Westminster, MA 01441-0001

Contact: Jim Goyette (978) 731-8580 Fax (978) 731-8881

Email: [email protected]

DESIGN: Models 4098-9714, -9714TSP, -9714TTP, -9754 -9754TSP, -9754TTP; GSA4098-9714, and

-9754 analog photoelectric type smoke detectors. Units are intended for use with smoke

detector bases Models 4098-9789 9789TSP, -9789TTP, -9791, -9791TSP,

-9791TTP, -9792, -9792TSP, 9792TTP, -9793, 9793TSP, -9793TTP, -9794,

-9794TSP,-9794TTP; GSA4098-9792, and -9793 (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0026:217).

Models 4098-9714, -9714TSP and -9714TTP are listed for use with Models 4098-9750,-9751,

-9752 and -9753 duct detector units (CSFM Listing No. 3240-0026:220) and Models

4098-9755, -9755TSP and -9755TTP duct detector units (CSFM Listing No. 3240-0026:241).

Models 4098-9754, -9754TSP, -9754TTP; GSA4098-9754 analog photoelectric type smoke

detectors employ an integral supplemental heat sensor (1350 F fixed temperature and 1200

F rate of rise). This heat sensor is intended for use as a supplemental device to the smoke

detector and is not intended for use in lieu of required heat detectors.

Refer to listee's printed data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational

considerations.

INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances

and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Model 4098-9714 with Model

4098-9751 is suitable for installations inside air ducts with air velocities between 0-2000 fpm.

MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with listee’s separately listed *compatible

fire alarm control units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.

NOTE: The photoelectric type detectors are generally more effective at detecting slow, smoldering

fires which smolder for hours before bursting into flames. Sources of these fires may include

cigarettes burning in couches or bedding. The ionization type detectors are generally more

effective at detecting fast, flaming fires that consume combustible materials rapidly and

spread quickly. Sources of these fires may include paper burning in a waste container or a

grease fire in the kitchen.

*Rev. 12-02-13 gt

July 01, 2015Date Issued: Listing Expires June 30, 2016

Authorized By:

Fire Engineering Division

This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed

the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not

an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct

operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other

JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator

yzhang

Rectangle

Features

TrueAlarm® analog sensing provides: • Digital transmission of analog sensor values via

IDNet™ or MAPNET II® two-wire communications** For use with the following Simplex® products: • 4010 and 4100U Series control panels; and 4008 Series

control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data sheet S4008-0001 for details)

• 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal Transponders and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped for MAPNET II operation

Fire alarm control panel provides: • Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each

sensor for individual sensitivity selection • Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72® sensitivity

testing requirements; automatic individual sensor calibration check verifies sensor integrity

• Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot

• Ability to display and print detailed sensor information in plain English language

Photoelectric smoke sensors provide: • Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7% Heat sensors provide: • Fixed temperature sensing • Rate-of-rise temperature sensing • Utility temperature sensing Ionization smoke sensors provide: • Three levels of sensitivity; 0.5%, 0.9%, and 1.3% General features: • UL listed to Standard 268 • Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke

capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas are minimally visible when ceiling mounted

• Designed for EMI compatibility • Magnetic test feature is provided • Optional accessories include remote LED alarm

indicator and output relays Additional base reference: • For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0025 • For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0028 • For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S4098-0024

(single address) and S4098-0033 (dual address) * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to

Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings 7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster.

4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric Sensor Mounted in Base

Description Digital Communication of Analog Sensing. TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog measurement digitally communicated to the host control panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal condition is determined by comparing the sensor’s present value against its average value and time. Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s average value provides a continuously shifting reference point. This software filtering process compensates for environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either up or down. Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as the individual application requires. Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive during day). Control panel programming can also provide multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2% level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a 2.5% level may initiate an alarm.

Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor base’s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors. ** TrueAlarm analog sensors are protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:

5,155,468; 5,173,683; 5,400,014; 5,543,777; 5,710,541; D383,407; D388,352; D392,573. MAPNET II and IDNet addressable communications designs are protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,796,025.

TrueAlarm® Analog Sensing

UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric, MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Ionization, and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories

S4098-0019-12 8/2008

Sensor Base Features

Base mounted address selection: • Address remains with its programmed location • Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor) General features: • Automatic identification provides default sensitivity

when substituting sensor types • Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or

trouble (steady on) • Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet

box • Magnetically operated functional test

Sensor Bases

4098-9792, Standard sensor base 4098-9789, Sensor base with wired connections for: • 2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822

relay (unsupervised) 4098-9791, Sensor base with supervised relay driver output (not compatible with 2120 CDT): • Relay operation is programmable and can be manually

operated from control panel • Use with remote mount 2098-9737 relay • Also includes wired connections for remote LED alarm

indicator or 4098-9822 relay

Sensor Base Options

2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay: • DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power

limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC coil power)

4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay: • Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local

alarm or trouble • DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power

limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC coil power)

4098-9832, Adapter plate: • Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to

4” square electrical box and for surface mounting to 4” octagonal box

• Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8” diameter base product

2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm Indicator: • Mounts on single gang box

(shown in illustration to right)

Description

TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable electronics that constantly monitor the status of the detachable photoelectric, ionization, or heat sensors. Each sensor’s output is digitized and transmitted to the system fire alarm control panel every four seconds.

Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. This feature also allows intentional sensor substitution during building construction. When conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be installed without reprogramming the control panel. Although the control panel will indicate an incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a default sensitivity providing heat detection for building protection at that location.

Mounting Reference

Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;single gang, 2" deepWith relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,with 1-1/2" extension ring

TrueAlarm Bases4098-9789, -9791, & -9792

4-7/8" (124 mm)

15/16"(24 mm)

6-3/8" (162 mm)

1/4"(6.4 mm)

4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required formounting to surface mounted boxes

and 4" square flush box

Surface mount reference4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box


2098-9737 Relay (mounts inbase electrical box or remotely)

4098-9822 Relay (mountsin base electrical box)

Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches)(64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)

NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessoriesbeing wired to determine required box volume.


2 S4098-0019-12 8/2008

TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories

ALARM

TrueAlarm Sensors Features

Sealed against rear air flow entry Interchangeable mounting EMI/RFI shielded electronics Heat sensors: • Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature

sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation • Rated spacing distance between sensors:

Fixed Temp. Setting

UL & ULC Spacing

FM Spacing, Either Fixed Temperature Setting

135° F (57.2° C)

60 ft x 60 ft (18.3 m)

155° F (68° C)

40 ft x 40 ft (12.2 m)

20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed temperature only; RTI = Quick 50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed temperature with either rate-of-rise selection; RTI = Ultra Fast

Smoke Sensors: • Photoelectric or ionization technology sensing • 360° smoke entry for optimum response • Built-in insect screens

4098-9733 Heat Sensor

TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel. Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C) per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at 135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed temperature setting. TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. Refer to specific panels for availability.

2-3/8"(60 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)


4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base

WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly recommended.

4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor

TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel. The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.

2-1/8"(54 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)


4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base

4098-9717 Ionization Sensor

TrueAlarm Ionization sensors use a single radioactive source with an outer sampling ionization chamber and an inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity. Smoke and invisible combustion gases can freely penetrate the outer chamber. With both chambers ionized by a small radioactive source [Am 241 (Americium)], a very small current flows in the circuit. The presence of particles of combustion will cause a change in the voltage ratio between chambers. This difference is measured by the electronics in the sensor base and digitally transmitted back to the control panel for processing. Three levels of sensitivity are available for each ionization sensor: 0.5, 0.9, and 1.3% per foot of smoke obscuration.

2-1/8"(54 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)


4098-9717 Ionization Sensor with Base

Application Reference

Sensor locations should be determined only after careful consideration of the physical layout and contents of the area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code®. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual (574-709).

3 S4098-0019-12 8/2008

dallen

Rectangle

dallen

Line

TrueAlarm Sensor Bases* Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

4098-9792 Standard Sensor Base, no options Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” min. depth; or single gang box, 2” min. depth

Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 4098-9789

Sensor Base with connections for Remote LED Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay

2098-9808 remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717 2098-9737 remote relay (supervised) 4098-9791

Sensor Base with connections for Supervised Remote Relay and connections for Remote Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay

2098-9808 remote alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay (unsupervised)

4” octagonal or 4” square box

Note: Box depth requirements depend on total wire count and wire size, refer to accessories list below for reference.

TrueAlarm Sensors Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

4098-9714 Photoelectric Smoke Sensor 4098-9717 Ionization Smoke Sensor 4098-9733 Heat Sensor

Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789, and 4098-9791 Refer to base requirements

TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements

2098-9737 Supervised Relay, mounts remote or in base electrical box For use with 4098-9791 base

Remote Mounting requires 4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth Base Mounting requires 4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring

2098-9808 Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate Single gang box, 1-1/2” minimum depth

4098-9822 Relay, tracks base LED status (unsupervised, mounts only in base electrical box)

Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring

4098-9832 Adapter Plate Bases 4098-9792, -9789, & -9791 Required for surface or semi-flush mounted 4” square box and for surface mounted 4” octagonal box

* Refer to Installation Instructions 574-707 and Application Manual 574-709 for additional information.

Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GMBH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, TrueAlarm, IDNet, and MAPNET II are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Tyco Safety Products Westminster • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA S4098-0019-12 8/2008

www.tycosafetyproducts-usa-wm.com © 2008 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

General Operating Specifications

Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, 24-40 VDC w/data, 400 μA typical, 1 address per base

Communications Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm2 to 2.08 mm2) Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current 1 mA typical, no impact to alarm current Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) UL Listed Temperature Range 32° to 100° F (0° to 38° C)

with 4098-9717 or 4098 -9733 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C) Operating Temperature Range with 4098-9714 15° to 122° F (-9° to 50° C)

Humidity Range 10 to 95% RH

4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor Air velocity = 0-2000 ft/min (0-610 m/min) Smoke Sensor Ambient Ratings 4098-9717, Ionization Sensor Air velocity = 0-200 ft/min (0-61 m/min); Altitude is up to 8000 ft (2.4 km)

Housing Color Frost White 4098-9791 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 2098-9737 (see page 2 for contact ratings)

Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage 18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current 270 μA, from 24 VDC supply Alarm Current with 2098-9737 Relay 28 mA, from 24 VDC supply

4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 (see page 2 for contact ratings) Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage 18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current Supplied from communications Alarm Current 13 mA from separate 24 VDC supply

TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart

Specifications

dallen

Rectangle

dallen

Line




LISTING SERVICE


CATEGORY: 7270 -- HEAT DETECTOR




DESIGN: Models 4098-9733, 4098-9733E, *4098-9734, *4098-9734E, GSA4098-9733 or

*GSA4098-9734 electric combination rate compensated, fixed temperature, and rate of rise

heat detectors. Intended for use with *listee's separately listed compatible detector bases.

Refer to listee's printed data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational

considerations.

RATING: 135°F and 155°F all models. 190°F (-9734 models only)


and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/temperature ratings and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as heat detector for use with listee’s separately listed compatible fire alarm control

units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.

*Rev. 02-18-14 gt


Authorized By:







mhansen

Rectangle

Features

Isolator base for TrueAlarm analog sensors using IDNet addressable communications: Compatible with: Simplex® fire alarm control panel

models 4100ES, 4010ES, 4008, 4010, and 4100U When panel mounted quad isolation is also required for

4100ES and 4010ES panels, use IDNet+ Modules (see diagram notes and individual panel data sheets)

Can be installed up to 250 total allowing isolation directly to the device level (200 total with 4008)

Base mounted LED indicates sensor status Designed for EMI compatibility UL listed to Standard 268; ULC listed to Standard S529

Short circuit wiring isolation: Input is automatically separated from output when an

output communications short circuit occurs

Earth fault isolation reduces time to fix wiring problems: Built-in control panel diagnostics assist in locating earth

fault conditions – the most common installation wiring problem

Isolator base 4098-9793 is compatible with: Photoelectric sensor model 4098-9714 Heat sensor model 4098-9733 Multi-sensor model 4098-9754 For Class B or Class A wiring: Communications are received from either input or output

allowing bases with Class A wiring to isolate short circuits while still operating their sensors

Description

TrueAlarm Sensing and IDNet communication isolation. The 4098-9793 IDNet Communications Isolator Base provides Simplex TrueAlarm analog sensor operation and also provides IDNet communications isolation to improve installation convenience and increase system integrity. Isolation is automatically activated at the base when an output short circuit is detected and isolation can also be selected per base manually from the control panel to assist with troubleshooting wiring problems.

Operation. Isolator bases power-up in isolation mode and are directed to connect by the control panel. If the output wiring is acceptable, the isolator base will connect to the rest of the circuit. If the output wiring is shorted, the isolator remains isolated.

* This product is listed by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7300-0026:0217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.

IDNet addressable device

Addressable station

TrueAlarm sensor

ALARMFIRE

PULL DOWN

TrueAlarm sensor

4098-9793 Isolator Base with TrueAlarm Sensor

Out

SIMPLEX TIM E RECORDER CO .

4090-9101

M ONITOR ZAM, CLASS B

INSTAL . INSTR. 574 -183

DATE CODE:

1

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

1234

5678

+ 24V0V

+IDNET- IDNET

ZONE PW R +ZONE PW R -IDC +IDC -

IDNet Channel with a Single 4098-9793 Isolator Base (4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel shown for reference)

Description (Continued)

Status Tracking. The isolator reports back to the panel when it is in isolator mode and the extent of shorted wiring is reported back to the panel by identifying device addresses that are not communicating. [Isolators are assigned sequentially to low number addresses to expedite Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) power-up. Refer to Installation Instructions 574-709 and 574-707 for additional information.]

Earth Faults. During installation, earth faults often occur and finding these faults normally requires extensive wiring disconnection. With the 4098-9793 isolator base, wiring suspected to have earth faults can be isolated to assist in their discovery and repair.

TrueAlarm Analog Sensing UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; TrueAlarm Analog Sensors MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Model 4098-9793, IDNet Isolator Base

S4098-0025-6 6/2014

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

The one-line diagram on this page shows a multiple floor example with Class B IDNet communications for each floor starting at an isolator base. If any floor wiring beyond the isolator base should experience a short circuit, each floor can be individually separated from the next, preventing the short circuit from disabling the entire IDNet communications wiring.

In the event of an earth connection, each floor can be individually isolated using the built-in control panel diagnostics. With individual floor control, the earth fault can be isolated to the floor level to narrow the search area.

2 S4098-0025-6 6/2014

First floor

Second floor

Third floor

Fourth floor

Class B riser

IDNet communications, 2 wire (see wiring notes)

Wiring Notes:

1. Only IDNet communications wiring is shown.

2. Maximum resistance from panel to isolator and between isolators is 10 ohms.

3. Some IDNet devices require additional wiring for power. Refer to specific devices for details.

4. NOTE: For 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4100U systems, if panel mounted IDNet Isolators are needed with remote isolators, use an IDNet+ module with isolated output. (The 4100-3103 panel mounted Quad Isolator is compatible with MAPNET II Remote Isolators only.) Refer to data sheet S4100-0046 for the 4100-3107 Quad IDNet Isolator module and specific control panel data sheets for details).

Compatible Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panel (model 4010ES

shown for reference)

Compatible IDNet device

4098-9793 IDNet Isolator Base with TrueAlarm sensor

Multi-Floor Isolator Example 1

The illustration below is a modification of Example 1. Wiring for each floor has an additional isolator base and the IDNet circuit is wired as a Class A connection. With the addition of these isolator bases, wiring between floors can be better protected in the event of a short circuit. Also, in the event of an earth connection, the additional isolator base per floor allows earth fault isolation to be achieved with better precision.

The isolator base examples on pages 2 and 3 show that as more isolator bases are added to an IDNet addressable communications loop, short circuit isolation and earth fault location can be obtained with a resolution level as close to the single device as required.

3 S4098-0025-6 6/2014

First floor

Second floor

Third floor

Fourth floor

Class A IDNet Circuit

IDNet communications, 2 wire(see wiring notes)

Wiring Notes:

1. Only IDNet communications wiring is shown.

2. Maximum resistance from panel to isolator and between isolators is 10 ohms.

3. Some IDNet devices require additional wiring for power. Refer to specific devices for details.

4. NOTE: For 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4100U systems, if panel mounted IDNet Isolators are needed with remote isolators, use an IDNet+ module with isolated output. (The 4100-3103 panel mounted Quad Isolator is compatible with MAPNET II Remote Isolators only.) Refer to data sheet S4100-0046 for the 4100-3107 Quad IDNet Isolator module and specific control panel data sheets for details).

4. For Class A IDNet communications, it is recommended that Remote Isolators or Isolator Bases be located close to the panel as the first and the last device as indicated (not necessary when using the 4100-3107 IDNet+ module or other panel mounted IDNet+ module).

Alternate Wiring ExampleClass A riser with Isolator bases using Class B taps

Compatible IDNet device

4098-9793 IDNet Isolator Base with TrueAlarm sensor

Compatible Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panel (model 4100ES

shown for reference)

First device Last device

Multi-Floor Isolator Example 2

Power and Communications IDNet communications, one address per base

Distance Specification Maximum line resistance between panel and isolator, or between isolators is 10 ohms; [18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) = 780 ft (238 m)]

IDNet Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 to 2.08 mm2 )

UL Listed Temperature Range 32° F to 100° F (0° C to 38° C)

Operating Temperature Range 15° F to 122° F (-9° C to 50° C)

Storage Temperature Range 0° F to 140° F (-18° C to 60° C)

Humidity Range 10 to 95% RH, from 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C)

Housing Color Frost white

Sensor Compatibility (sensors are ordered separately)

Product Data Sheet Reference

4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor S4098-0019

4098-9733, Heat Sensor

4098-9754, TrueSense Multi-Sensor S4098-0024

Additional Isolator Products 4090-9116, Remote IDNet Isolator Module S4090-0005

4090-9117, 24 V Addressable Power Isolator (not available with 4008 control panels)

S4090-0006

TrueAlarm Sensor(ordered separately)

4098-9793Isolator Base

2-1/8"(54 mm)

4-7/8" (124 mm)

Base height15/16" (24 mm)

1/4"(6.4 mm)

6-3/8" (162 mm)

Surface mount reference

4" (102 mm)square box

4" (102 mm)octagonal box



Electrical Box Requirements:4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;single gang, 2" deep (by others)

AssembledDimensionReference

4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for mountingto surface mounted boxes and to 4" square flush mount boxes


Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA S4098-0025-6 6/2014

www.simplexgrinnell.com © 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Specifications (for additional information refer to Installation Instructions 574-709 and 574-707)

Mounting Information




LISTING SERVICE


CATEGORY: 7300 -- FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES




DESIGN: Models 4098-9780,-9780E,-9789, -9789E, 9789TSP, -9789TTP, -9791, -9791E, -9791TSP,

9791TTP,-9792, -9792E, -9792TSP, 9792TTP, -9793, -9793E, -9793TSP, -9793TTP, -9794,

-9794TSP, -9794TTP, -9795, -9795TSP, -9795TTP, -9796, -9796TSP, -9796TTP;

GSA4098-9780, -9792, -9793, -9795 and -9796 smoke detector bases. These bases act as

an interface between the sensor and the MAPNET controller. Bases are intended for use with

the following units: Models 4098-9714 and GSA4098-9714 series photoelectric smoke

detector (CSFM Listing No. 7272-0026:218); Model 4098-9717 ionization smoke detector

(CSFM Listing No. 7271-0026:231); and Models 4098-9733, GSA4098-9733, *4098-9734 and

*GSA4098-9734 heat detectors (CSFM Listing No. 7270-0026:216). Models 4098-9795,

-9795TSP, -9795TTP, -9796, -9796TSP, -9796TTP; GSA4098-9795, and -9796 are only

intended for use with Models 4098-9754 or GSA4098-9754 photoelectric smoke detector

(CSFM Listing No.7272-0026:218). Refer to listee’s printed data sheet for additional detailed

product description and operational considerations.

INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances


MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as detector bases for use with listee's separately listed compatible fire alarm control

units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.

Models 4098-9794, -9794TSP, -9794TTP, -9795, -9795TSP, -9795TTP; and GSA4098-9795

employ a sounder, which is also suitable for use as a fire alarm audible signaling device.

These base/sounders CAN NOT produce the temporal code pattern in accordance with

NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. If this temporal code is required, the sounder/base unit must be

used with the control unit that can produce the temporal pattern.

*Rev. 02-06-14 gt


Authorized By:







yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

Features•   Approvals include:  UL Standard 1971, ULC, New York City    (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and Chicago    (BFP)•   Uniquely designed to accept an independent strobe and      audible input from the FACP and convert to a single output    that connects to Wheelock’s Series AS or Series NS family of    audible strobes•   Series DSM Sync Modules can also be used to synchronize     Wheelock’s Series Exceder, RSS, RSSP and SLM Sync Strobes•   3 ampere per circuit current handling at 12 or 24 VDC•   Low operating current draw•   Compatible with all standard fire alarm control panels•   Meets the NFPA-72 requirement for Temporal Pattern when    used with the Series AS/AH and/or Series Exceder•   3 year warranty

Series DSM

FIRE ALARMCONTROL PANEL

(FACP)

Series PSOR 

OTHER POWERBOOSTERS

DSM

AS/AH, HS, HS4/HSST, RSS, RSSP,

E w/STB, ET w/STB, CH w/STB

APPLIANCES

DSM Connection Diagram with Power Booster

DescriptionThe Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules are utilized with the Series Exceder, Series AS/AH, Series RSS, Series RSSP, Series SLM and  selected  strobe  applications with  other Wheelock combination appliances.When  used with  Series AS Audible  Strobes  and/or  Series Exceder  Horn  Strobes,  the  DSM  Sync Modules  provide independent operation of synchronized temporal pattern (code 3) horn and synchronized strobe flash, as well as the ability to silence the horn while maintaining the strobe flash. while using only a single pair of wires.  The DSM-12/24 Sync Modules control  either a Class A or two (2) Class B NAC circuits.

Series DSM Sync Modules

THE CITY OFNEW YORK

DEPARTMENT OF BUILDINGS

UL®

151-92-EE5946 7300-0785:132

Notification

Table1: Sync Module (DSM) Current Requirements (AMPS)

ULVoltage

ULC Voltage

Rated Average Current

Rated Peak Current

Rated Inrush Current

In1/In2 Audible In1/In2 Audible In1/In2 Audible

8.0 VDC 10.5 VDC 0.019 0.004 0.055 0.004 0.150 0.016

12.0 VDC 12.0 VDC 0.020 0.004 0.064 0.004 0.170 0.019

24.0 VDC 24.0 VDC 0.035 0.008 0.080 0.008 0.342 0.030

33.0 VDC 33.0 VDC 0.045 0.010 0.090 0.010 0.470 0.040

8.0 VRMS 8.0 VRMS 0.028 0.005 0.107 0.008 0.210 0.016

12.0 VRMS 12.0 VRMS 0.030 0.006 0.103 0.009 0.240 0.019

24.0 VRMS 24.0 VRMS 0.048 0.010 0.145 0.015 0.480 0.033

33.0 VRMS 31.0 VRMS 0.062 0.012 0.175 0.022 0.685 0.056

Note: DSM Dual Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes per circuit. The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is twenty (20).  CAUTION: Use DSM Sync Modules only on NAC circuits with continuously applied voltage. Do not use DSM Sync Modules on coded or interrupted NAC circuits in which the applied voltage is cycled on and off.  CAUTION: Power Boosters may be used in conjunction with the DSM Sync Modules only in the order shown below. Only one DSM Sync Module shall be allowed on a NAC circuit. Do not connect Power Booster to the NAC circuit after the one DSM Sync Module. Exception: The Wheelock Power Booster can be connected either before or after the DSM Sync Module. Refer to Power Booster instruction manual for proper application and installation.

  WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES THAT ARE CONNECTED TO A SM OR DSM DOES NOT EXCEED 3.0A OR EXCEED THE RATING OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL’S PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SOURCES AND NAC CIRCUITS. OVERLOADING THESE SOURCES COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER AND FAILURE TO ALERT OCCUPANTS DURING AN EMERGENCY, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

When calculating the total current, use Tables 1& 2 to determine the highest value of “Rated Average Current” for the SM or DSM (across the listed volt-age range), then add this value to the total current for any other appliances powered by the same source and include any required safety factors. Refer to Instruction Sheet for addtional information.

  WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL FUSES USED ON NAC CIRCUITS ARE RATED TO HANDLE THE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENT FROM ALL APPLIANCES ON THOSE CIRCUITS. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER TO THE NAC CIRCUIT AND THE FAILURE OF ALL APPLIANCES ON THAT CIRCUIT TO OPERATE, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol . All warnings are printed in bold capital letters.

WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

Table 3: Current Consumption DSM Modules

Outpurt Circuit Description of SM/DSM Module SM Module

DSM Module Ref. Fig.

Class “B” with Audible Silence    (dual circuit) Y 1

Class “B” with No Audible Silence    (dual circuit) Y 2

Class “A” with Audible Silence    (single circuit) Y 3

Class “A” with No Audible Silence    (single circuit) Y 4

FIG. 1 DUAL CLASS “B” CIRCUIT WITH AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE

FIG. 2 DUAL CLASS “B” CIRCUIT WITH NO AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE

Notes1.  Non-Sync Appliances can be installed before or after a DSM. If the Non-Sync appliance requires audible silence, four    wire connection is necessary with the strobe circuit connected before the DSM NAC circuit, and the audible leads      connected to a silenceable NAC circuit from the FACP.2.  The audible appliance produces a momentary interruption (approximately 25ms) each time the strobes flash.3.  Circuit #2 may be omitted if only 1 circuit is required when using the DSM.4.  Non-Sync Audible Appliances can be installed on the audible NAC. Be aware of the current requirement for the SM or DSM    module.  See table 3.

FIG. 3 SINGLE CLASS “A” CIRCUIT WITH AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE

FIG. 4 SINGLE CLASS “A” CIRCUIT WITHOUT AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE

Specifications and Ordering Information            R = Red* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method.  UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed volt-age range (16-33v for 24v units).  For strobes the UL max current is usually at  the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units).   For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v   for 24v units).   For unfiltered FWR ratings, see  installation instructions. ** Refer to Data sheet # S7000 for Mounting Options.*** The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is          twenty (20). *** The total distance from the first to the last DSM shall not          exceed 1,000 feet of #18 AWG wire. Use only #18 AWG wire.

Model Order Code

Input Voltage

VDC

Average Current @ 12 or 24 VDC

UL Max*

Mounting Options**

DSM-12/24-R*** 6374 12 0.020 0.026 W24 0.035 0.055 W

The sync modules shall be Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules. Series DSM Sync Modules shall be the master controllers for Wheelock Series Exceder, AS/AH, RSS, RSSP and appliances where a synchronized audible/visual audible or visual only appliance is specified. All modules shall be UL listed under Standard 464.  Series DSM modules shall be designed to interface with Series AS Audible Strobe Appliances and Horn Strobe Appliances to produce a synchronized temporal (Code 3) horn as well as synchronized strobe flash on a two-wire alarm circuit. Other synchronized products are the Wheelock Series Exceder, RSS, RSSP, SLM visual only appliances and Series AH and Exceder Horn Appliances.

DSM modules shall provide an additional strobe circuit input/output for control of either two Class “B” NAC circuits or a single Class “A” NAC circuit. Upon activation of the audible silence function at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, the audible signal component of Series AS Audible Strobe and/or the Series NS Horn Stobe may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation.

DSM module shall be DSM-12/24 for control of either Class A two (2) Class B NAC circuits. The DSM dual circuit version shall provide the additional capability of “daisy-chaining”, that is, the ability to interconnect multiple DSM’s for synchronous horn and strobe operation on multiple NAC circuits. Interconnection capability shall be for a maximum of 40 NAC circuits. All modules shall operate on either 12 or 24 VDC. The DSM 12/24 shall be .020 amperes @ 12 VDC and .035 amperes @ 24 VDC. The dual circuit DSM Sync Module shall be capable of handling a load of 3 amperes per NAC circuit at 12 or 24 VDC.All versions shall be polarized for DC supervision and shall incorporate screw terminals for in/out field wiring of #18 to #12 AWG wire size. DSM Sync modules shall mount to a 4-11/16” x 2-1/8” deep backbox.

Architects and Engineers Specifications

S3000 DSM 06/11

NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock Inc. standard terms and conditions.

  WARNING: THESE APPLIANCES WERE TESTED TO THE OPERATING VOLTAGE LIMITS OF 8-33 VOLTS USING FILTERED DC OR UNFILTERED FULL-WAVE RECTIFIED (FWR). DO NOT APPLY 80% AND 110% OF THESE VOLTAGE VALUES FOR SYSTEM OPERATION. THE APPLICATION OF IMPROPER VOLTAGE MAY RESULT IN DEGRADED OPERATION OR DAMAGE TO THESE PRODUCTS, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

Wheelock products must be used within their published specifications and must be PROPERLY specified, applied, installed, operated, maintained and operationally  tested  in  accordance with  their  installation  instructions at  the  time of  installation  and at  least  twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, regulations and laws. Specification, application, installation, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for proper operation in accordance with all of the latest National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL), National Electrical Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), local, state, county, province, district, federal and other applicable building and fire standards, guidelines, regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

  WARNING: CONTACT WHEELOCK FOR “INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS” (P83177-DSM) AND “GENERAL INFORMATION” SHEET ON THESE PRODUCTS. These documents do undergo periodic changes. It is important that you have current information on these products. These materials contain important information that should be read prior to specifying or installing these products including:• TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES CONNECTED TO SYSTEM SECONDARY POWER SOURCES.• FUSE RATINGS ON NAC CIRCUITS TO HANDLE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENTS FROM ALLAPPLIANCES ON THOSE NAC CIRCUITS.• COMPOSITE FLASH RATE FROM MULTIPLE STROBES WITHIN A PERSON’S FIELD OF VIEW.• THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THESE PRODUCTS MUST BE WITHIN THEIR RATED IN PUT VOLTAGE RANGE.• INSTALLATION IN OFFICE AREAS AND OTHER SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION ISSUES.• USE STROBES ONLY ON NAC CIRCUITS WITH CONTINUOUSLY APPLIED OPERATING VOLTAGE. DO NOT USE STROBE ON CODED OR INTERRUPTED NAC CIRCUITS IN WHICH THE APPLIED VOLTAGE IS CYCLED ON AND OFF AS THE STROBE MAY NOT FLASH.

WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION3 YEAR WARRANTY

NotificationCooper Notification is

NJ Location273 Branchport Ave.Long Branch, NJ 07740P: 800-631-2148F: 732-222-8707www.coopernotification.com




LISTING SERVICE


CATEGORY: 7300 -- FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES

LISTEE: Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243

Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336


DESIGN: Models SM-12/24, SMX-12/24, DSM-12/24 and DSMX-12/24 Synchronized Control Modules.

Models SM-12/24 and DSM-12/24 may be followed by -R, -W, -X or -S. Refer to listee's data

sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations.

RATING: 8-33 VDC*



MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as signaling appliances accessory for use with separately listed synchronized strobe

lights. For indoor use only.

*Rev. 05-26-10 bh


Authorized By:







yzhang

Rectangle

DescriptionThe Wheelock patented 2-wire Series AS Audible StrobeAppliances and Series AH Audibles offer more features withlow current draw.

Strobe options for wall mount models include 1575cd or the

selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd, or the high

Ceiling mount models incorporate Wheelock’s patented MCC

selectable 115/177cd.

The audible provides a selectable choice of either acontinuous horn or temporal pattern (Code 3) whenconstant voltage from a Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) isapplied. Each tone has 3 dBA settings to choose from.

When used with the Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules,Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers panelsincorporating the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol,synchronization of the continuous horn tone provides thetemporal (code 3) tone (mandated by NFPA72) simultaneouslyfor all audible appliances. This ensures a distinct temporal(code 3) pattern when 2 or more audibles are within hearingdistance. If not synchronized the temporal sound could overlapand not be distinctive. At the same time the strobes will besynchronized. This provides the ability to comply with ADAguidelines concerning photosensitive epilepsy and the NFPAstandards when installing 2 or more visual appliances within

is achieved by using only 2 wire.

FeaturesApprovals include: UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464New York City (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM),Factory Mutual (FM), and Chicago (BFP). See approvals by

ADA/NFPA/UFC/ANSI Compliant

Wall mount models are available with Field Selectable

Candela models) or 1575cd (single candela model)

candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd (multi-candelaceiling models)

Selectable Continuous Horn or Temporal (Code 3).

3 Selectable dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones

Patented 2-Wire Audible Strobe Appliance.

Patented Universal Mounting Plate

Weatherproof models are available for outdoor use

voltage range

12 and 24 VDC models with wide UL “Regulated Voltage

Synchronize using the Wheelock Sync Modules or panels withbuilt-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol

F orW ea th erproof SeriesA S, SeeD a ta sh eetS9 004

ÌØÛ Ý×ÌÇ ÑÚ

ÒÛÉ ÇÑÎÕ

ÜÛÐßÎÌÓÛÒÌ ÑÚ ÞË×ÔÜ×ÒÙÍ

151-92-EE5946S5391

ÛÈÌ ØÑÎÒ

dallen

Typewritten Text

EXT HORN

Table 3: Average RMS Current

24 VDC Models

1575cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 115cd 177cd

High (99)

dBA

0.080 0.088

UL max* 0.121 0.125 0.200 0.267 0.355 0.095 0.221 0.355

Med (95)

dBA

0.033 0.080 0.060 0.066

UL max* 0.043 0.107 0.074 0.110 0.190 0.253 0.340 0.465 0.122 0.201 0.269 0.340 0.465

Low (90)

dBA UL max* 0.021 0.100 0.105 0.245 0.335 0.460 0.074 0.113 0.263 0.335 0.460

12 VDC Models

High (99)

dBA

12 vdc 0.163 0.260

UL max* 0.192 0.320

Med (95)

dBA

12 vdc 0.076 0.195

UL max* 0.275

Low (90)

dBA

12 vdc 0.039 0.175

UL max* 0.265

VDC VDC/FWR

AS-24MCW 24 16.0 - 33.0 15/30/75/110

AS-24MCCH 24 16.0 - 33.0 115/177

AS-241575W 24 16.0 - 33.0 15 (75 on Axis)

AS-121575W 12 15 (75 on Axis)

AS-24MCC 24 16.0 - 33.0 15/30/75/95

AS-24MCWH 24 16.0 - 33.0

ASWP-2475W 24 16.0 - 33.0 75 @ -31°F

ContinuousHorn

High 91 99

Medium 95

Low 90

Code 3 Horn

High 99

Medium 95

Low 79 90

* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max currentrating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33vfor 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimumlisted voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually

ratings, see installation instructions.

#

24.0 VDC 0.105

UL Max* 0.155 0.150

General Notes:

ÛÈÌ ØÑÎÒ

Í»®·» ÐÍ

Ð±©»® Í«°°´·»

ÛÑÔÎÑËÌÐËÌÍ

ïóì

ìóÝÔßÍÍ

þÞþ

ÑÎ

îóÝÔßÍÍ

þßþ

ßÍ

ßÍ

ßÍ ÍÌ

ÍÌ

ÍÌ

õó

õ ó

õó

ÚÎÑÓ

ÐÎÛÝÛÜ×ÒÙ

ßÐÐÔ×ßÒÝÛ

ÑÎ ÚßÝÐ

ÌÑ ÒÛÈÌ

ßÐÐÔ×ßÒÝÛ

ÑÎ ÛÑÔÎ

Wiring Diagrams #

# For detail using DSM Sync Module refer to Data Sheet

wiring informationon the power supplies refer to Installation

VDC VDC

AS-24MCW-FR 9024 15/30/75/110 X X X - X - X X X X X

AS-24MCW-FW 9025 15/30/75/110 X X X - X - X X X X X

AS-24MCWH-FR X X X - X - X X X X -

AS-24MCWH-FW 3469 X X X - X - X X X X -

AS-241575W-FR 7405 15 (75 on Axis) X X X - X - X X X X X

AS-121575W-FR 7410 15 (75 on Axis) X X - X X - X X X X X

AS-24MCC-FR 3161 15/30/75/95 X X X - - X X X X X -

AS-24MCC-FW 3162 15/30/75/95 X X X - - X X X X X -

AS-24MCCH-FW 3467 115/177 X X X - - X X X X X -

ASWP-2475W-FR** 9012 75 @ -31°F X X X - X - I (see Data Sheet S9004) X X X X X

AH-24-R - X X X - X X X X X X X

AH-24-W - X X X - X X X X X X X

AH-12-R - X X - X X X X X X X X

AH-12-W - X X - X X X X X X X X

AH-24WP-R** 7416 - X X X - X X K X X X - X

AH-12WP-R** 7415 - X X - X X X K X X X - X

Ú

ß

Ý

ÐÜÍÓ ýíß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·® ò

Í¬®±¾» ÒßÝ Ý·®ò

ÜÍÓ ýî

ÜÍÓ ýï



ß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·® ò

ß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·® ò

ßÍ ßÍ

ßÍ ßÍ

ßÍ ßÍ

Í§²½

Í§²½

Í§²½

õ

óõ

õó

ó

ÜÍÓ ×²¬»®½±²²»½¬·²¹ ©·®·²¹ ¸±©²ò Ó¿¨·³«³ ±º

¬©»²¬§ øîð÷

equals. The Series AS Audible be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire ProtectionService. The Series AH Audible shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). Both shall meet the requirementsof FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire AlarmControl Panel (FACP).

of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs.

candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance).

When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Suppliesor other manufacturers panels with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at anytime during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a

activation when used with Wheelock synchronization.

The Series AS Audible Strobe and Series AH Audible shall incorporate a Patented Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mountingto a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 100mm European type backboxes, or the SHBB Surface Backbox. If required, an NATP

3 YEAR WARRANTY

ÒÖ Ô±½¿¬·±²

îéí Þ®¿²½¸°±®¬ ßª»ò

Ô±²¹ Þ®¿²½¸ô ÒÖ ðééìð

Ðæ èððóêíïóîïìè

Úæ éíîóîîîóèéðé

©©©ò½±±°»®²±¬·º·½¿¬·±²ò½±³




LISTING SERVICE


CATEGORY: 7125 -- FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED




DESIGN: Models AS-1215, -2415, -1230, -2430, -121575, -241575, -2475 and -24110 audible/strobes

for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters indicating lens

orientation, lettering and color.

Models AS-1215W, -2415W, -1230W, -2430W, -121575W, -241575W, -2475W and -24110W

audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters

indicating lens orientation, lettering and color. These units with suffix -W are for wall mount

only. *Models AS-121575W and AS-241575W lens color may be white, red, blue, green, or

amber.

Models AS-2415C, -2430C, -2475C and -24100C audible/strobes for the hearing impaired

followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating lens lettering, orientation and color.

These units are intended for ceiling mount only.

Model AH-12, -24, AH-12WP, -24WP audible appliances (no strobe), followed by an alpha or

numeric character indicating product color.

Model AS-24MCW and AS-24MCC audible/strobe, followed by any two alpha or numeric

character indicating lettering and product color. *Lens color may be white, red, blue, green,

or amber.

Models ASWP-2475W and *ASWP-2475C audible/strobe with integral private mode

fire/emergency visual signaling for non-hearing impaired applications. Lens color may be

white, red, blue, green, and amber. Both models are suitable for outdoor use when mounted

on the Model WPBB back box.

Models AS-24MCWH, AS-24MCCH, *ASWP-24MCWH, and *ASWP-24MCCH

audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating

lens lettering and product color. Units with suffix CH are for ceiling mount only. Units with

suffix WH are for wall mount only. *Lens color may be white, red, blue, green, or amber.

Refer to the listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational

considerations.

*Rev. 10-01-07


Authorized By:







reception

Rectangle

reception

Text Box

Exterior Horn

Listing No.

Page 2 of 2

7125-0785:0131

RATING: Electrical: 8-17.5/16-33 VDC/VFWR

Flash Rate: 60 flashes/minute

Candela: 15:15cd,1575:15/75cd,30:30cd,75:75cd,95:95cd,100:100cd, 110:110cd

MCW: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 75cd,110cd

MCC: Selectable 15cd, 30cd,75cd,95cd

MCWH: Selectable 135cd,185cd (65cd, 90cd at -40 C)

MCCH: Selectable 115cd,177cd (50cd, 75cd at -40 C)


and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models ASWP-2475W,

ASWP-24MCWH, AS-24MCW and AS-24MCWH are for wall mount only. Models

ASWP-2475C, ASWP-24MCCH, AS-24MCCH, AND AS-24MCC are for ceiling mount only.

Models with suffix -W or WH are for wall mount only. Models with suffix -C or -CH are for

ceiling mount only.

MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as audible and audible/visual signaling devices suitable for the hearing impaired when

used in conjunction with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. For

indoor use only except Models AH-12WP, AH-24WP, *ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C,

ASWP-24MCWH, and ASWP-24MCCH audible appliances are suitable for indoor/outdoor.

For synchronization, Models AS Series must be used with Model SM-12/24, SMX-12/24,

DSM-12/24 or DSMX-12/24 sync control module (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0785:132). Refer to

listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details .

These appliances can generate a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm

Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition.

NOTE: Models AH-12, AH-24, -12WP and -24WP audible devices are not suitable for the hearing

impaired applications.

*Rev. 10-01-07


Authorized By:







Description:

Strobe, Horn Strobe, and Horn Notification Appliances

Notification

Ceiling Wall

Wheelock® ExcederTM Series

TM

***

***5

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of notification appliances feature a sleek modern design that will please building owners with reduced total cost of ownership. Installers will benefit from its comprehensive feature list, including the most candela options in one appliance, low current draw, no tools needed for setting changes, voltage test points, 12/24 VDC operation, universal mounting base and multiple mounting options for both new and retrofit construction.

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series incorporates high reliability and high efficiency optics to minimize current draw allowing for a greater number of appliances on the notification appliance circuit. All strobe models feature an industry first of 8 candela settings on a single appliance. Models with an audible feature 3 sound settings (90, 95, 99 dB). All switches to change settings, can be set without the use of a tool and are located behind the appliance to prevent tampering. Wall models feature voltage test points to take readings with a voltage meter for troubleshooting and AHJ inspection.

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of wall and ceiling notification appliances feature a Universal Mounting Base (UMB) designed to simplify the installation and testing of horns, strobes, and combination horn strobes. The separate universal mounting base can be pre-wired to allow full testing of circuit wiring before the appliance is installed and the surface is finished. It comes complete with a Contact Cover for protection against dirt, dust, paint and damage to the contacts. The Contact Cover also acts as a shunting device to allow pre-wire testing for common wiring issues. The Contact Cover is polarized to prevent it from being installed incorrectly and prevents the appliance from being installed while it is on the UMB. When the Contact Cover is removed the circuit will show an open until the appliance is installed. The UMB allows for consistent installation and easy replacement of appliances if required. Wall models provide an optional locking screw for extra secure installation, while the ceiling models provide a captivated screw to prevent the screw from falling during installation.

- Save up to 48% in current draw*

- Up to 9 models now in 1 appliance

- Save up to 14% cost of installation**

Compatibility and Requirements- Synchronize using the Wheelock® Sync Modules or panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol- Compatible with UL “Regulated Voltage” using filtered VDC or unfiltered VRMS input voltage- Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the “Regulated Voltage” range

* Compared to competitive models** Compared to previous models

*** Patented

* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16 VDC for 24 VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions.

Strobe Ratings per UL Standard 1971UL Max Current*

24 VDC / 24 FWR 12 VDC

Model Regulated Voltage Range VDC 15 15/75 30 60 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185 15 15/75

ST 8.0-33.0 0.057 0.070 0.085 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110 0.140

STC 8.0-33.0 0.061 0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110

Horn Strobe Ratings per UL 1971 & Anechoic at 24 VDCUL Max Current* at Anechoic 99 dBA

24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.095 0.102 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125 0.159

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125

UL Max Current* at Anechoic 95 dBA

24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.083 0.087 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 0.153

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.075 0.084 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120 0.148

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120

Horn Ratings per UL Anechoic

Model Regulated Voltage Range VDC 99 dB 95 dB 90 dB

HN 16-33.0 0.064 0.044 0.022

HNC 16-33.0 0.084 0.044 0.022

HN 8.0-17.5 0.047 0.026 0.017

HNC 8.0-17.5 0.047 0.026 0.017

Low Current Draw = Fewer Power Supplies

NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol . All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING

OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERNOTIFICATION.COM OR CONTACT COOPER NOTIFICATION FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

General Notes:General Notes:• Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their “Regulated Voltage Range”.• All candela ratings represent minimum effective strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.• Series Exceder Strobe products are Listed under UL Standards 1971 and 464 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%) UL 464 (85% UL 1971).• Series Exceder horns are under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only).

yzhang

Rectangle

jrastrelli

Rectangle

Specification & Ordering Information

Model Strobe Candela

Sync w/ DSM or

Wheelock Power Supplies

12/24 VDC* Mounting Options

Horn Strobes

HSR 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

HSW 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

HSRC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

HSWC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

Strobes

STR 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

STW 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

STRC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

STWC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

Horn

HNR X X UMB**

HNW X X UMB**

HNRC X X UMB**

HNWC X X UMB**




ST 8.0-33.0 0.057 0.070 0.085 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110 0.140

STC 8.0-33.0 0.061 0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.095 0.102 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125 0.159

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.083 0.087 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 0.153

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.075 0.084 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120 0.148

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120

Model Legend

HN = HornST = StrobeHS = Horn StrobeC = Ceiling MountW = WhiteR = Red

Example 1: STRC = Strobe, Red, Ceiling MountExample 2: HSR = Horn Strobe, Red, Wall MountExample 3: HSW = Horn Strobe, White, Wall MountExample 4: STW-AL = Strobe, White, Wall Mount, Alert Lettering

Common base for wall and ceiling with 5 mounting options

Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and easy spot checking (wall models only)

Example: HSR

8 ca

ndel

as o

n 1

devi

ce

1 ga

ng, 2

gan

g, 4

” sq,

3.5

” oct

al &

4” o

ctal

box

es

8 candela settings

NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Cooper Wheelock Inc., dba Cooper Notification standard terms and conditions.

**UMB = Universal Mounting Base

*UMB

Easy

to re

mem

ber m

odel

cod

es

Example: HSWC

Contact Cover

*12 VDC models feature 15 & 15/75 settings

A = Agent Lettering (Strobes only) AL = Alert Lettering (Strobes only)N = No Lettering (Strobes only)

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

The notification appliances shall be Wheelock® Exceder™ Series HS Audible Strobe appliances, Series ST Visual Strobe appliances and Series HN Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series HS and ST Strobes shall be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The Series HS and HN Audibles shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All Series shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with the ability to operate from 8 to 33 VDC. Indoor wall models shall incorporate voltage test points for easy voltage inspection.The Series HS Audible Strobe and ST Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series shall be of low current design. Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have 8 field selectable settings at 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135, 185 candela for wall mount and 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, 177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). Appliances with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a visible location at all times when installed.The audible shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. The Series HS Audible Strobe, ST Strobe and Series HN Audible shall incorporate a patented Universal Mounting Base that shall allow mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 3.5-inch octal, 4-inch octal or 100mm European type back boxes. Two wire appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting base. Continuity checking of the entire NAC circuit prior to attaching any notification appliances shall be allowed. Product shall come with Contact Cover to protect contact springs. Removal of an appliance shall result in a supervision fault condition by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The mounting base shall be the same base among all horn, strobe, horn strobe, wall and ceiling models. All notification appliances shall be backwards compatible.The Series HS and ST wall models shall have a low profile measuring 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 2.19” D. Series HN wall shall measure 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 1.6” D. The Series HSC and STC shall been round and have a low profile with a diameter of 6.68” x 2.63” D. Series HNC ceiling shall have a diameter of 6.68” x 1.50” D.When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock®’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock® Power Supplies or other manufacturer’s panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync protocol fails to operate, the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate and still maintain (1) flash per second over its Regulated Voltage Range. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation when used with Wheelock® synchronization protocol.

Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FMCeiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM

Exceder - Spec Sheet 6/11

WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION3 YEAR WARRANTY







LISTING SERVICE






DESIGN: Exceder Series: Models ST strobe, HS horn strobe and HN horn. Model ST is a synchronous

and non-synchronous strobe light. Model HS a visual/audible appliance and Model HN is an

audible signal appliance. All units followed by R (red) or W (white). Additionally, a ‘C’ may be

added for ceiling models and/or a ‘-NR’ may be added for non-resettable models. For non

-NR models and optional ‘S’ for silver fascia may be added*. Refer to listee's data sheet for

additional detailed product description and operational considerations.

RATING: Electrical: 12 VDC/24VDC/FWR

Candela (wall)*: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135 & 185

Candela (ceiling)*: 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, & 177


and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. All models are for indoor use

and for wall mount only or ceiling mount only*


APPROVAL: Listed as horn for fire alarm signaling and strobe, horn /strobe for the hearing impaired when

used with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee ’s

Installation Instructions Manual for details.

*Rev. 9-24-09 fm


Authorized By:







yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Highlight

yzhang

Highlight

Description:

Strobe, Horn Strobe, and Horn Notification Appliances

Notification

Ceiling Wall

Wheelock® ExcederTM Series

TM

***

***5

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of notification appliances feature a sleek modern design that will please building owners with reduced total cost of ownership. Installers will benefit from its comprehensive feature list, including the most candela options in one appliance, low current draw, no tools needed for setting changes, voltage test points, 12/24 VDC operation, universal mounting base and multiple mounting options for both new and retrofit construction.

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series incorporates high reliability and high efficiency optics to minimize current draw allowing for a greater number of appliances on the notification appliance circuit. All strobe models feature an industry first of 8 candela settings on a single appliance. Models with an audible feature 3 sound settings (90, 95, 99 dB). All switches to change settings, can be set without the use of a tool and are located behind the appliance to prevent tampering. Wall models feature voltage test points to take readings with a voltage meter for troubleshooting and AHJ inspection.

The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of wall and ceiling notification appliances feature a Universal Mounting Base (UMB) designed to simplify the installation and testing of horns, strobes, and combination horn strobes. The separate universal mounting base can be pre-wired to allow full testing of circuit wiring before the appliance is installed and the surface is finished. It comes complete with a Contact Cover for protection against dirt, dust, paint and damage to the contacts. The Contact Cover also acts as a shunting device to allow pre-wire testing for common wiring issues. The Contact Cover is polarized to prevent it from being installed incorrectly and prevents the appliance from being installed while it is on the UMB. When the Contact Cover is removed the circuit will show an open until the appliance is installed. The UMB allows for consistent installation and easy replacement of appliances if required. Wall models provide an optional locking screw for extra secure installation, while the ceiling models provide a captivated screw to prevent the screw from falling during installation.

- Save up to 48% in current draw*

- Up to 9 models now in 1 appliance

- Save up to 14% cost of installation**

Compatibility and Requirements- Synchronize using the Wheelock® Sync Modules or panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol- Compatible with UL “Regulated Voltage” using filtered VDC or unfiltered VRMS input voltage- Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the “Regulated Voltage” range

* Compared to competitive models** Compared to previous models

*** Patented

* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16 VDC for 24 VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions.




ST 8.0-33.0 0.057 0.070 0.085 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110 0.140

STC 8.0-33.0 0.061 0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.095 0.102 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125 0.159

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.083 0.087 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 0.153

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.075 0.084 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120 0.148

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120

Horn Ratings per UL Anechoic

Model Regulated Voltage Range VDC 99 dB 95 dB 90 dB

HN 16-33.0 0.064 0.044 0.022

HNC 16-33.0 0.084 0.044 0.022

HN 8.0-17.5 0.047 0.026 0.017

HNC 8.0-17.5 0.047 0.026 0.017

Low Current Draw = Fewer Power Supplies

NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol . All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING

OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERNOTIFICATION.COM OR CONTACT COOPER NOTIFICATION FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.

General Notes:General Notes:• Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their “Regulated Voltage Range”.• All candela ratings represent minimum effective strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.• Series Exceder Strobe products are Listed under UL Standards 1971 and 464 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%) UL 464 (85% UL 1971).• Series Exceder horns are under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only).

yzhang

Rectangle

Specification & Ordering Information

Model Strobe Candela

Sync w/ DSM or

Wheelock Power Supplies

12/24 VDC* Mounting Options

Horn Strobes

HSR 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

HSW 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

HSRC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

HSWC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

Strobes

STR 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

STW 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185 X X UMB**

STRC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

STWC 15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177 X X UMB**

Horn

HNR X X UMB**

HNW X X UMB**

HNRC X X UMB**

HNWC X X UMB**




ST 8.0-33.0 0.057 0.070 0.085 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110 0.140

STC 8.0-33.0 0.061 0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.095 0.102 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125 0.159

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.082 0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.083 0.087 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 0.153

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.073 0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122


24 VDC 12 VDC


HS 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.075 0.084 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120 0.148

HSC 8.0-33.0 0.065 0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120

Model Legend

HN = HornST = StrobeHS = Horn StrobeC = Ceiling MountW = WhiteR = Red

Example 1: STRC = Strobe, Red, Ceiling MountExample 2: HSR = Horn Strobe, Red, Wall MountExample 3: HSW = Horn Strobe, White, Wall MountExample 4: STW-AL = Strobe, White, Wall Mount, Alert Lettering

Common base for wall and ceiling with 5 mounting options

Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and easy spot checking (wall models only)

Example: HSR

8 ca

ndel

as o

n 1

devi

ce

1 ga

ng, 2

gan

g, 4

” sq,

3.5

” oct

al &

4” o

ctal

box

es

8 candela settings

NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Cooper Wheelock Inc., dba Cooper Notification standard terms and conditions.

**UMB = Universal Mounting Base

*UMB

Easy

to re

mem

ber m

odel

cod

es

Example: HSWC

Contact Cover

*12 VDC models feature 15 & 15/75 settings

A = Agent Lettering (Strobes only) AL = Alert Lettering (Strobes only)N = No Lettering (Strobes only)

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

The notification appliances shall be Wheelock® Exceder™ Series HS Audible Strobe appliances, Series ST Visual Strobe appliances and Series HN Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series HS and ST Strobes shall be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The Series HS and HN Audibles shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All Series shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with the ability to operate from 8 to 33 VDC. Indoor wall models shall incorporate voltage test points for easy voltage inspection.The Series HS Audible Strobe and ST Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series shall be of low current design. Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have 8 field selectable settings at 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135, 185 candela for wall mount and 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, 177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). Appliances with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a visible location at all times when installed.The audible shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. The Series HS Audible Strobe, ST Strobe and Series HN Audible shall incorporate a patented Universal Mounting Base that shall allow mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 3.5-inch octal, 4-inch octal or 100mm European type back boxes. Two wire appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting base. Continuity checking of the entire NAC circuit prior to attaching any notification appliances shall be allowed. Product shall come with Contact Cover to protect contact springs. Removal of an appliance shall result in a supervision fault condition by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The mounting base shall be the same base among all horn, strobe, horn strobe, wall and ceiling models. All notification appliances shall be backwards compatible.The Series HS and ST wall models shall have a low profile measuring 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 2.19” D. Series HN wall shall measure 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 1.6” D. The Series HSC and STC shall been round and have a low profile with a diameter of 6.68” x 2.63” D. Series HNC ceiling shall have a diameter of 6.68” x 1.50” D.When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock®’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock® Power Supplies or other manufacturer’s panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync protocol fails to operate, the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate and still maintain (1) flash per second over its Regulated Voltage Range. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation when used with Wheelock® synchronization protocol.

Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FMCeiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM

Exceder - Spec Sheet 6/11

WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION3 YEAR WARRANTY







LISTING SERVICE






DESIGN: Exceder Series: Models ST strobe, HS horn strobe and HN horn. Model ST is a synchronous

and non-synchronous strobe light. Model HS a visual/audible appliance and Model HN is an

audible signal appliance. All units followed by R (red) or W (white). Additionally, a ‘C’ may be

added for ceiling models and/or a ‘-NR’ may be added for non-resettable models. For non

-NR models and optional ‘S’ for silver fascia may be added*. Refer to listee's data sheet for

additional detailed product description and operational considerations.

RATING: Electrical: 12 VDC/24VDC/FWR

Candela (wall)*: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135 & 185

Candela (ceiling)*: 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, & 177


and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. All models are for indoor use

and for wall mount only or ceiling mount only*


APPROVAL: Listed as horn for fire alarm signaling and strobe, horn /strobe for the hearing impaired when

used with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee ’s

Installation Instructions Manual for details.

*Rev. 9-24-09 fm


Authorized By:







yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

Applications:Indoor for:• Fire Alarm Circuits• Initiating Devices• Notification Devices• Division 28 05 13.23

Fire Alarm CablesPower-Limited Multiple Conductor/

Unshielded

CatalogNo.

No. of Cond.

ConductorType & Nom.

D.C.R

Insulation Type& Thickness

Shielding Jacket Type &Thickness

Nom.O.D.

NECType

Nom.Capacitance

JacketColor

980 1Pair

18 AWGSolid

6.5 Ω/Mft

PP*.008 None PVC

.017 .146 FPLFPL RR 19 pf/ft* RED

982 4 18 AWGSolid

6.5 Ω/Mft

PP*.008 None PVC

.017 .170 FPLFPL RR 19 pf/ft* RED

990 1Pair

16 AWGSolid

4.1 Ω/Mft

PP*.008 None PVC

.017 .168 FPLFPL RR 20 pf/ft* RD, BL, WH

Standard spool size 1000ft.

Rating:• NEC Type FPLR• (UL) Listed• Meets 300V requirements as specified in the NEC• Flame Rating: UL1666

Description:• ASTM bare copper • Polypropylene insulation • Twisted pair or cabled

construction • Overall PVC jacket

992 416 AWG

Solid4.1 Ω/Mft

PP*.008 None PVC

.017 .198 FPLFPL RR 20 pf/ft* Red

994 1Pair

14 AWGSolid

2.6 Ω/Mft

PP*.012 None PVC

.017 .210 FPLFPL RR 22 pf/ft*RD, BL, YE

700 414 AWG

Solid2.6 Ω/Mft

PP*.012 None PVC


998 1Pair

12 AWGSolid

1.8 Ω/Mft

PP*.012 None PVC


Inches Inches Inches

Special Notes:• Selected Plenum Versions see pages 113• Selected Indoor/Outdoor Aquaseal Water

Resistant® Versions see Aquaseal Section pg.115• Select Items are Packaged in our Advantage Box• Orange rip cord under jacket• PP* - Polypropylene

112 www.westpenn-wpw.com | 800-245-4964 | Specifications subject to change

BULK CABLES: Fire Alarm Unshielded FPLR

Color Code

AllCables

1.Black, 2. Red, 3. Brown, 4. Blue

JACKET: Red

SelectCables

INDICATOR CODE:RD- Red, BL-Blue, OR-Orange, WH-White, YE-

Yellow • 500ft LENGTHS MAY BE AVAILABLE UPONREQUEST. MINIMUM QUANTITIES APPLY.

• CUSTOM COLORED JACKETS MAY BE AVAILABLE. MINMUM QUANTIES APPLY.

8. FIRE ALARM111-124_Layout 1 5/13/15 9:30 AM Page 2

yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Arrow




LISTING SERVICE


CATEGORY: 7161 -- CABLES-FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING

LISTEE: West Penn Wire2833 W Chestnut St, Washington, PA 15301

Contact: Mark Sams (724) 222-7060 Fax (724) 229-1151


DESIGN: Types FPL and FPLP power limited fire protective signaling cable. Refer to listee's data

sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations.

INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, NEC Article 760, applicable

codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

MARKING: Listee's name, type, NEC rating and UL label.

APPROVAL: Listed as power-limited fire protective signaling cable.

*Rev. 05-23-2005


Authorized By:







yzhang

Rectangle

yzhang

Rectangle

12/14/2015 Page 1 of 2

SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2)

600 Volts. Copper Conductor.

Thermoplastic Insulation/ Nylon Sheath.

Heat, Moisture, Gasoline, and Oil Resistant II.

All Sizes Rated Both THHN and either THWN (sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG) or THWN-2 (sizes 8 AWG and larger).

Also Rated MTW and AWM (See Below). SIMpull® Technology for Easier Pulling.

APPLICATIONS Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services, feeders, and branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical Code. Voltage for all applications is 600 volts. SIMpull® conductors are designed to be installed without application of a pulling lubricant.

These conductors have multiple ratings. Depending upon the product application, allowable temperatures are as follows:

• THHN or T90 Nylon- Dry locations not to exceed 90° C

• THWN-2- Wet or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not to exceed 75° C when exposed to oil

• THWN- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not to exceed 75° C when exposed to oil

• TWN75- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C

• MTW- Wet locations or when exposed to oil at temperatures not to exceed 60° C or dry locations not to exceed 90° C (with ampacity limited to that for 75° C conductor temperature per NFPA 79)

• AWM- Dry locations not to exceed 105° C only when rated and used as appliance wiring material

SPECIFICATIONS Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors comply with:

· ASTM - B3, B8, and B787 (19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded)

· UL Standards 83, 758, 1063, and 1581

· CSA C22.2 No. 75, T90 Nylon/TWN75 Sizes through 1000 kcmil

· NOM-ANCE 90° C

· Federal Specification A-A-59544

· NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658) Construction Requirements

· National Electrical Code, NFPA 70

· CT Rated in Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger

· VW-1 - Sizes 14 through 1 AWG

· FT1 - All Sizes

· Sunlight Resistant – Sizes 2 AWG and larger

· AWM - Sizes 14 through 6 AWG

· MTW - Stranded Constructions Only

· RoHS/REACH Compliant

CONSTRUCTION Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors are made with soft drawn copper. Sizes 14 through 4/0 AWG use a combination-unilay stranding while 250 kcmil and larger sizes use a compressed copper stranding. The wire is covered with a tough heat and moisture resistant PVC insulation with an overall nylon jacket utilizing SIMpull® Technology. Available in black, white, red, blue, purple, green, yellow, orange, brown, and gray. Also available in striped configurations. Some colors are subject to economic order quantity. Marked as THHN in all sizes. Also marked as THWN-2 in sizes 8 AWG and larger or marked as THWN in sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG. Marked sunlight resistant in sizes 2 AWG and larger. Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in SIMpull® Barrel or CoilPAK® configurations.

12/14/2015 Page 2 of 2

SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2)

Conductor Insulation Thickness (mils)

Jacket Thickness (mils)

Nominal O.D. (mils)

Approx. Weight per 1000' (lbs)

Allowable Ampacities+

Size (AWG or kcmil)

Number of Strands

60° C 75° C 90° C Standard Package

14* 1 15 4 102 15 15 15 15 AC

12* 1 15 4 119 23 20 20 20 AC

10* 1 20 4 150 36 30 30 30 AC

14* 19 15 4 109 16 15 15 15 AC

12* 19 15 4 128 24 20 20 20 AC

10* 19 20 4 161 38 30 30 30 AC

8 19 30 5 213 63 40 50 55 ABCD

6 19 30 5 249 95 55 65 75 ABCD

4 19 40 6 318 152 70 85 100 ABCD

3 19 40 6 346 189 85 100 115 ABCD

2 19 40 6 378 234 95 115 130 ABCD

1 19 50 7 435 299 110 130 145 ABCD

1/0 19 50 7 474 372 125 150 170 ABCD

2/0 19 50 7 518 462 145 175 195 ABCD

3/0 19 50 7 568 575 165 200 225 ABCD

4/0 19 50 7 624 718 195 230 260 ABCD

250 37 60 8 694 851 215 255 290 ABCD

300 37 60 8 747 1012 240 285 320 ABC

350 37 60 8 797 1174 260 310 350 ABC

400 37 60 8 842 1334 280 335 380 ABC

500 37 60 8 926 1655 320 380 430 ABCD

600 61 70 9 1024 1987 350 420 475 ABC

750 61 70 9 1126 2464 400 475 535 BC

1000 61 70 9 1275 3257 455 545 615 C

* Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in SIMpull® Barrel or CoilPAK® configurations.

+Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the 2014 Edition of the National Electrical Code Sections 310.15 and 240.4(D). Unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures the conductor shall be limited to the following per NEC 110.14(C):

60° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for 14 - 1 AWG conductors. 75° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than 1 AWG. 90° C - THHN dry locations and THWN-2 wet or dry locations for ampacity adjustment purposes using NEC section 310.15.

Standard Package:

A - 2500' Reel B - 1000' Reel C - 500' Spool D - 5000' Reel


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Removing existing sapling trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, A.C. paving,

concrete curb, gutter and base material, existing concrete slabs. 2. Clearing and grubbing, removal of existing brush and trees, unless shown to remain. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place, [removing site

utilities. 4. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

B. The contractor attention is directed to the requirements in Division 1 regarding the preservation of existing trees. The work also includes the removal and disposal of obstacles above and below ground that conflict with the work in this project whether or not such obstructions are as shown on the plans.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS:

A. The editions, specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the reference.

B. Standard Specifications:

1. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). 2. Standard Special Provisions of the Regional Standards Committee. 3. City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769345 (current

edition). 4. California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for Construction

and maintenance Work Zones", (current edition), Document No. 869159.

C. Standard Drawings:

1. City of San Diego Standard Drawings, Document No. 769374 (current edition).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 2

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain University’s property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Quality Control.”


A. The plans show general information only. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the site to determine the exact existing conditions and character and extent of the work to be performed and clearing operations required.

B. Existing underground lines shown on the plans are shown from best possible information available and shall be verified prior to start of any work. The Contractor is responsible for locating all underground lines by potholing and/or locator service. The University maintains a list of locator firms familiar with the underground conditions.

C. Preserve in operating condition all active utilities transversing or within and about the site. Promptly repair any damage to such utility or work due to work under this contract, to the satisfaction of the University's Representative.

D. Existing appurtenances and improvements, which are to remain, shall be protected from damage due to work under this section. Such damaged facilities shall be promptly repaired and/or replaced in kind.

E. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from University and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 3

F. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining University’s property will be obtained by University before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by University’s Representative.

G. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on University’s premises where indicated.

H. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

1.8 BARRICADES AND WORK AREA:

A. Provide barricades and warnings (signs and lighting), and maintenance and supervision thereof, in accordance with applicable Federal and State codes and their respective requirements, or as may be directed from time to time by the University's Representative. Do not commence site clearing until barricades and warnings are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL:

A. Clear and grub per Section 0300-1 standard specifications except as modified herein.

3.2 LIMITS:

A. The limits of clearing, grubbing and demolition shall include all areas of work.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 4

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to University.

3.4 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.5 UTILITIES

A. Existing utility lines shall be removed as indicated on plans. Prior to their removal, all required new re-routing and new connections shall be completed and made operative so that their functions to other existing structures served by them can be continuous and uninterrupted. Abandoned utility lines encountered during construction shall be removed.

B. University will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

C. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. University will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by University or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify University’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without University’s Representative written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

F. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.

3.6 USE OF EXPLOSIVES:

A. Use of explosives will not be permitted.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 5

3.7 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. The limits of clearing and grubbing shall be the area of new construction

B. Remove all trash, rubbish and all other material not suitable for construction operations.

1. Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

2. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

3. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

4. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

5. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 6. Chip removed tree branches and [stockpile in areas approved by [University’s

Representative] [dispose of off-site].

C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches , and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.8 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.9 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 6

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. All removed and demolished material, including but not limited to concrete, asphalt concrete, trees, brush, vegetation and trash resulting from the work of this section is the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed to a legal disposal area off campus. Asphalt and concrete shall not be used as fill material unless otherwise noted.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.



EARTHWORK

312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 – EARTHWORK

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Subbase course for concrete concrete site work. 4. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and

pits for buried utility structures.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control

measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS:

A. The editions, specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the reference.

B. Standard Specifications:

1. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). 2. Standard Special Provisions of the Regional Standards Committee. 3. City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769345 (current

edition). 4. California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for Construction

and Maintenance Work Zones", (current edition), Document No. 869159.

C. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to the text by basis designation only.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: 2. C 33-86 Concrete Aggregates 3. C 136-84a Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 4. D 4318-84 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils 5. D 1140-54 Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the (R 1971)No. 200

(75 micrometer) Sieve 6. D 1556-82 Density of Soil Place by Sand Cone Method (R 1974) 7. D 1557-78 Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

Using 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457mm) drop 8. D 2103-81 Polyethylene Film and Sheeting 9. D 2419-74 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregates (R

1979) 10. D 2487-85 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes 11. D 2922-81 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth)


EARTHWORK

312000 - 2

D. D 3017-78Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in place by Methods (Shallow Depth)

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

A. Deliver and store materials in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation.

1.4 RECORDS OF INVESTIGATION:

A. Refer to "Information Available to Bidders".

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Pipe Zone: The pipe zone shall include the full width of trench from the bottom of the pipe or conduit to a horizontal level 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Where multiple pipes or conduits are placed in the same trench, the pipe zone shall extend from the bottom of the lowest pipes to a horizontal level above the top of the highest or topmost pipe. Thickness of pipe zone above the highest top of pipe shall be as described above unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the particular type of pipe installed.

E. Pipe Bedding: The pipe bedding shall be defined as a layer of material below the bottom of the pipe or conduit as shown on the Drawings and extending over the full trench width in which the pipe is bedded. Use a minimum thickness of 6 inches for the pipe bedding unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the particular type of pipe installed.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 3

J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."

B. 2013 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, Volume 2 of 2, Appendix J, Grading.

C. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54 kg) and 18-inch (457-mm) Drop.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by District or others unless permitted in writing by District’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify District’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without District’s Representative's written permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Materials for compact fill shall consist of any soil imported or excavated from the cut areas. The soil shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 3 inches in maximum dimension and shall contain at least 30% of material smaller than 3/4 inch in size. Material of


EARTHWORK

312000 - 4

perishable, spongy, or otherwise improper nature shall not be used in fills. Asphalt concrete pieces shall not be used in fill

Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, GW, GP, GM,

SC, SW, SP, and SM or a combination of these groups. Expansion Index (EI)

less than 30 as measured by ASTM D 4829.

Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH,

and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2

percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

B. Native earth backfill used above the pipe zone shall be excavated, non-expansive, fine-grained material free of roots, debris, and rocks larger than 3 inches.

C. Materials placed within 36 inches of rough grade shall be select material as specified in Part 1 above. The material shall not swell more than 3% when compacted to 90% relative compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1557 under an axial load of 160 psf.

D. Representative samples of material to be used for fill shall be tested in the laboratory in the order to determine the maximum density, optimum moisture content and classification of the soil. To prevent the importation of contaminated materials to the site, prior to delivery, soil materials obtained from off-site sources shall be sampled and tested in compliance with CA EPA Department of Toxic Substances Control “Information Advisory, Clean Imported Fill Material”, dated October 2001. Results will be submitted to the District for approval. Do not import soils that exhibit a known risk to human health, the environment or both.

1. Non-corrosive in accordance with the Caltrans (2012) corrosion guidelines and ACI

318 (2011). These include an electrical resistivity value greater than 1,000 ohm-centimeters, chloride content of less than 500 ppm, sulfate content of less than 1,000 ppm and pH greater than 5.5

E. Fill material to be used under the building, slabs, pavement, and structures shall be on-site or imported material, conforming to the above. Excavated on-site material will be considered suitable for structural fill if it is free from organic matter and other deleterious substances and conforms to the requirements specified above. No material shall be placed without the approval of the District's Representative under the direction of the District's Geotechnical Engineer.

F. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

G. Base Course: Aggregates for base course shall conform to Section 26 of the Standard Specifications, Class 2 for 3/4 inch maximum size gradation.

H. Engineered Fill: Satisfactory Soil Materials / Borrow Fill Material, as described above, placed in lifts no greater than 8 inches thick (loose measurements) and each lift moisture conditioned. All engineered fill should be densified to a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent per ASTM D 1557.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 5

I. Pipe Bedding: Sand material providing a sand equivalent of at least 30. All of the sand bedding shall be compacted to 90 percent of maximum density as indicated in the Contract Documents by mechanical means. Flooding and jetting shall not be permitted without prior written approval from the Geotechnical Engineer. Where sheeting or shoring is used densification of the bedding shall be accomplished after the sheeting or shoring has been removed from the bedding zone, unless the sheeting or shoring is to be cut off or left in place. Pipe bedding material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding (8) eight inches.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

2.2 IMPORTED SAND - PIPE ZONE:

A. Imported sand used in the pipe zone or for the pipe base shall have the following gradation:

1. Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

1) 3/8 inch 100 2) No. 4 75 - 100 3) No. 30 12 - 50 4) No. 100 5 - 20 5) No. 200 0 - 10

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 32 Section "Site Clearing."


EARTHWORK

312000 - 6

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 32 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.

3.2 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.3 STAKING AND GRADES:

A. Lay out work, establish necessary markers, bench marks, grading stakes, and other stakes as required.

B. Existing and finish elevations are shown on the drawings, and unless inconsistencies therein are brought to the attention of the District's Representative in writing prior to commencement of the construction, the Contractor will be held responsible for the proper location and elevation of all work.

3.4 COMPACTED FILLS:

A. Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any part of the trench excavated below the grade at no additional cost to the District with crushed rock. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 6 inches deep to the established grade.

B. General: Unless otherwise specified, fill material shall be compacted while at a moisture content near the optimum moisture content and to a density that is not less than the maximum density determined in accordance with the ASTM D 1557 or other density methods that will obtain equivalent results.

3.5 PREPARING AREAS TO BE FILLED:

A. Objectionable material shall be removed from the surface upon which the fill is to be placed and loose and porous soil shall be removed and compacted to the depths specified.

B. After the foundation has been cleared, plowed or scarified, it shall be disced or bladed until it is uniform and free from clods, brought to the proper moisture content and compacted as specified for fill.

3.6 PLACING, SPREADING, AND COMPACTING FILL MATERIAL:

A. The fill materials shall be placed in layers that when compacted shall not exceed 6". Each layer shall be spread evenly and be thoroughly mixed during the spreading to obtain uniformity of material in each layer.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 7

B. When the moisture content of the fill material is above that specified, the fill material shall be aerated by the Contractor by blading, mixing or other satisfactory methods until the moisture content is as specified.

C. When the moisture content of the fill material is below that specified, water shall be added by the Contractor until the moisture content is as specified.

D. After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly compacted to the specified density. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, vibratory roller, multiple-wheel pneumatic-tired rollers or other types of acceptable compacting equipment. Equipment shall be of such design that it will be able to compact the fill to the specified density. Compaction shall be continuous over the entire area and the equipment shall make sufficient trips to insure that the desired density has been obtained throughout the entire fill.

E. After the subgrade has been compacted, the surface shall be reshaped to conform to the drawings and high or low spots eliminated. The finished subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling, vibrating and tamping to a uniform dense surface. The subgrade shall be protected from displacement by equipment or other operations.

F. Where fills are constructed on hillsides or slopes, topsoil, slopewash and colluvium shall be removed. Where the exposed slope is steeper than 6 horizontal to 1 vertical, or where specified, the slope on the original ground on which the fill is to be placed shall be stepped or benched. The bottom bench shall be a minimum of 15 feet wide, at least 2 feet deep, and expose firm material over the entire excavation. After excavation of existing ground or removal of unacceptable material at the exposed subgrade, scarify the surface and compact as described above. The District's Geotechnical Engineer will be afforded the opportunity to determine the width and frequency of all succeeding benches.

G. No asphalt concrete, Portland Cement Concrete or any other rubble shall be allowed in fill.

3.7 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

A. Over-Excavate areas beneath and five feet beyond building foundations to 3-ft below existing grade. Recompact native materials if satisfactory, or provide satisfactory fill materials per requirements of this specification.

B. Structural excavation and backfill shall be done per Sections 300-3.1, 300-3.3, 300-3.4 and 300-3.5 of the Standard Specifications. Jetting shall not be permitted.

3.8 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Excavate for foundations, pits, trenches, footings, floor slabs, concrete walks to the lines and levels required, shown on the drawings and specified herein, and provide shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The bottoms of trenches shall be level, tamped firm, clean and free from debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from standing water at all times.

B. Excavated earth material which is suitable for structural fill or backfill, as determined by the District's Representative, shall be conditioned for re-use and properly stockpiled for later


EARTHWORK

312000 - 8

filling and backfilling operations. Conditioning shall consist of spreading in layers not to exceed 8 inches. Rocks and aggregate, exceeding 6" in the largest dimension, and deleterious material shall be removed from the site off campus to a legal disposal site.

C. Abandoned sewers, piping, and other utilities encountered in the progress of the excavation, shall be removed off campus to a legal disposal site.

3.9 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

3.10 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.11 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Trench widths in the pipe zone shall be as shown on the Drawings. If no details are shown, maximum width shall be 18 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter. Trench width at the top of the trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would undercut adjacent structures and footings. In such case, width of trench shall be such that there is at least 18 inches between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing.

C. Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any part of the trench excavated below the grade at no additional cost to the District with crushed rock. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 6 inches deep to the established grade.

D. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 9

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

F. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.12 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:

A. During trench excavation, place the excavated material adjacent to the trench as directed by the District's Representative. Do not obstruct any roadways or streets. Conform to federal and state codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material.

3.13 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify District’s Representative when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If District’s Representative determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by District’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by District’s Representative, without additional compensation.

3.14 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Over Excavation: If excavations for foundation work are made deeper than indicated, fill with same concrete as specified for foundation work, without additional expense to District. If excavations for foundation work are made wider than indicated, form footing work or fill with same concrete as specified for foundation work at no additional expense to District.

B. If excavations for slabs or flatwork are made deeper than indicated, fill with coarse, sand to required levels. Compact at optimum moisture content to 90 percent density.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 10

C. If excavations to greater depths than shown are required by the Geotechnical Engineer in order to reach satisfactory soil bearing conditions, the District's Representative is to be notified.

D. Surplus materials may not be disposed of on site and must be disposed of off campus in a legal disposal area per Section 300-2.6 of the Standard Specifications. Surplus soil may not be exported to a K-12 school site or to a residential site.

3.15 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.16 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.

3.17 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.

B. Backfill per the detailed piping specification for the particular type of pipe and per the following.

C. Place the specified thickness of pipe bedding material over the full width of trench. Grade the top of the pipe bedding ahead of the pipelaying to provide firm, uniform support along the full length of pipe.

D. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire joint.

E. After pipe has been bedded, place pipe zone material simultaneously on both sides of the pipe (maximum lift thickness 6") keeping the level of backfill the same on each side. Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe barrel is completely supported and that no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Use particular care in placing material on the underside of the pipe to prevent lateral movement during backfilling.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 11

F. Compact material placing within 12 inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand tamping only.

G. Push the backfill material carefully into the backfill previously placed in the pipe zone (maximum lift thickness 6"). Do not permit free fall of the material until at least 2 feet of cover is provided over the top of the pipe. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material directly onto the pipe or the tamped material around the pipe.

H. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

I. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the particular type of pipe installed, relative compaction in pipe trenches shall be as follows:

1. Pipe zone: 90% relative compaction. 2. Backfill above pipe zone not beneath paving: 90% relative compaction. 3. Backfill above pipe zone in repaved areas: 95% relative compaction for top 24

inches; 90% relative compaction for backfill below 24 inches. 4. Backfill above pipe zone in new pavement areas: 95% relative compaction for top 12

inches; 90% relative compaction for backfill below 12 inches.

J. Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Compact by using mechanical compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high impact hammer-type equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not damage the pipe.

K. Do not use any axle-driven or tractor-drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of walls and structures.

L. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.18 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 12

3.19 MATERIAL REPLACEMENT:

A. Remove and replace any trenching and backfilling material which does not meet the specifications, at the Contractor's expense.

3.20 FINISH GRADING:

A. General: Fine grade to bring areas to required lines and grades. The subgrade elevation within the building area for slabs on grade shall be within 1/2" along a 10"-0" straight edge.

B. Slope finish grades to drain surface water away from buildings, walks. Generally, grade with uniform slope between points where elevations are given, or between such points and existing grades.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

C. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

D. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.


A. Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. The Contractor shall conduct his operations to permit tests to be made without interference from his forces and equipment. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. When tests indicate that the density of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below the specified density, such layer or portion shall be re-worked and re-tested until the specified density has been obtained. Re-testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.

D. No more than two feet of fill in vertical elevation shall be placed without at least one field density test being made within that interval.

E. Samples: Submit at least one 50-pound composite sample for each 500 cubic yards of embankment material being placed. Samples, in the number directed, shall also be submitted whenever the source or character of the embankment material changes. Each sample shall be taken in three increments from the same truck one increment from the first


EARTHWORK

312000 - 13

third of the load, one when half of the load has been dumped, and one from the final third of the load during dumping of the material.

F. Each sample shall be contained in a clean container which shall be fastened to prevent loss of material. Each sample shall be tagged for identification. The tag shall contain the following information:

1. Project No. 2. Sample No. 3. Date of Sample 4. Sampler 5. Source 6. Intended Use

G. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by District’s Representative.

H. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2099/D 3017, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

4. In paved areas, one density test will be taken for each 2,000 square feet of subgrade in cut.

5. The District reserves the right to take more tests as required.

I. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.22 PROTECTION

A. During construction, properly graded excavated surfaces to provide positive drainage and prevent ponding of water. Control surface water to avoid damage to adjoining properties, or to finished work on the site. Take remedial measures to prevent erosion of freshly graded areas and slopes, until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed.

B. After completion of grading and the District's Representative has finished observations of the work, no further excavation or filling shall be done except under the observation of the District's Representative.


EARTHWORK

312000 - 14

C. Erosion prevention shall continue through the duration of the project. Any debris or washouts deposited at bottom of slope of graded areas shall be replaced immediately and reworked to proper compaction requirements.

D. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

E. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by District’s Representative; reshape and recompact.

F. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

2. Protect open excavations, trenches, and the like with fences, covers, and railings as required to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic passage. Prevent erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed.

3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off District's property.

3.24 EXISTING UTILITIES:

A. Existing utilities are shown from available records and the accuracy of their location cannot be guaranteed. The Contractor shall pothole as necessary to locate horizontally and vertically all existing utilities. Any discrepancy from the plans shall be reported to the District's Representative immediately. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs due to discrepancies in the location of existing utilities if the Contractor fails to pothole and locate existing utilities and notify the District's Representative of discrepancies prior to start of construction.

B. Abandoned utilities encountered during all construction operations shall be removed as required to complete all work shown on plans.

C. Live utilities shall remain in service at all times unless otherwise noted.

3.25 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Cleanup: Leave entire graded portions of the site "rake-clean".


EARTHWORK

312000 - 15

B. Disposal: Pick up and transport unsuitable, deleterious, excess material, and debris to an off-site legal disposal area.



ASPHALT PAVING

321216-1

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.


1. Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Division 32 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. State of California, Department of Transportation:

a. Current Edition; Standard Specifications.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. D 2172-81 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. DOT: Department of Transportation.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specifications of State of California, Department of Transportation.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

1. Prepare mix design; sample and test materials and equipment for compliance with the specifications. Properly mark samples to show the name of the material, name of the supplier, contract number and the segment of the work where the material represented by the sample is to be used. Submit copies of weighmaster's certificates or certified delivery tickets for each truck load of material.

2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance for the bituminous and paint materials.

3. Job-Mix Formula: Submit a job mix for each type of bituminous mixture prior to starting work. The formula shall be within the specified design range.

C. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

E. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

F. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.

1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with State of California, Department of Transportation for asphalt paving work.

B. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings” and Quality Control."


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-3

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings” and Quality Control." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

2. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic

during installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at

time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of

placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

1. The grading and proportioning of aggregates shall be such that the combined mineral aggregate conforms to the specified requirements.

B. Aggregate for asphaltic concrete shall conform to Section 39 of the Standard Specifications, Class B for individual test result conforming to 1/2 inch maximum size gradation, medium.

C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

D. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

E. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 64-22.

B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material.

1. Asphalt Cement: Section 92 of the Standard Specifications, Grade AR-8000 for parking lots and AR-4000 for streets.

C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70.

D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with State of California, DOT requirements.

E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

F. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

G. Water: Potable.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-5

H. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.

C. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

D. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 3405, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:

1. The bituminous concrete shall consist of mineral aggregate, uniformly mixed with bituminous material in a central plant in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. The percentage of asphalt cement binder shall be in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. The mixing plant and construction equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 39 of the Standard Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-6

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.

1. Mill to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold

milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep

material separate from milled hot-mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.

3.3 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly.

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-7

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide.

Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide.

Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-8

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.6 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Deliver bituminous mixtures to the roadbed at temperatures specified in Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. Spread in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. Cover all loads with tarpaulin or other material during transportation.

B. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high

side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls

and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

C. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

D. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.7 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix

Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-9

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.8 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Initial or breakdown rolling and the final rolling of the uppermost layer of the asphalt concrete shall be in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. Compaction by vehicular traffic shall not be permitted.

2. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.

2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Joining Pavement: Carefully make joints between old and new pavements or between successive day's work made in such manner as to insure a continuous bond between old and new sections of the course. Expose and clean edges of existing pavement. Cut edge to straight, vertical surfaces. Paint all joints with a uniform coat of tack coat before the fresh mixture is placed. Prepare joints in the new pavement in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications.

G. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-10

H. Protection of Pavement: After final rolling, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted on the pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case less than 6 hours.

I. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.9 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to

crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

3.10 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.

3.11 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Seal Coat: Seal coat shall be furnished and applied in accordance with the provisions in Section 37 of the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Department of Transportation, and shall be applied at a rate of 0.05 to 0.1 gallons of asphaltic emulsion per square yard of paving followed by a uniform layer of plaster sand over the entire paved surface. Ten days following seal coating, all excess and loose sand shall be swept and cleaned from the site. Care shall be exercising to avoid splattering asphalt on concrete structures, piping, etc. All structures, equipment and piping that


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-11

are adjacent to surfaces being sealed shall be wrapped with 15-pound building felt to a height of 4 feet prior to applying liquid asphalt.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.

3.12 INSPECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

A. The District's Representative shall have access at all times to all parts of the batch plant for checking the adequacy of the equipment in use, inspecting the operation of the plant, verifying weight, proportions and character of materials and checking temperatures being maintained in the preparation of the mixture.


A. Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. The in-place density of compacted base course will be determined. No payment will be made for the areas of pavement deficient in composition, density or thickness until they are removed and replaced. Determine maximum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method D. Perform in place density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556.

2. The asphalt content in percent by extraction in accordance with ASTM D 2172, Method A will be determined.

3. The field density of compacted asphalt concrete shall be determined by a properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device.

4. Compaction tests to be at a rate determined by the District for each lift or course of asphalt concrete placed.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site,


ASPHALT PAVING

321216-12

prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.14 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.


SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT gkkworks MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

312313-1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:

1. Parking lots. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walkways.


1. Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.

2. Division 32 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants of joints in concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The editions and specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the reference.

1. Standard Specifications:

a. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). b. Standard special provisions of the Regional Standards Committee. c. City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769709

(current date). d. California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for

Construction and Maintenance Work Zones," (current edition), Document No. 869159 (current date).

e. Standard Drawings: City of San Diego Standard Drawings, Document No. 769710 (current date).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.



312313-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items such as admixtures, curing materials, and joint systems.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Quality Control: Tests of concrete shall be made by a Testing Laboratory approved by the District's Representative. The cost of sampling and testing required by these specifications shall be borne by the District, except that any retesting of nonconforming material shall be paid for by the Contractor. Concrete shall have a compressive strength of 2,500 psi at the end of 28 days unless otherwise noted.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Applied finish materials. 6. Joint fillers.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.



312313-3

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain steel bars.

E. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:



312313-4

1. Concrete for flatwork shall be 520-C-2500 per Section 201-1 of the Standard Specifications.

2. Concrete for curbs and gutters shall be Class 520-C-2500 per Section 201-1 of the Standard Specifications.

3. Concrete for cross gutters shall be Class 560-C-3250 per Section 201-1 of the Standard Specification.

4. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

B. Combined Aggregate: 1" maximum coarse aggregate size conforming to Grading C of Standard Specifications Section 201-1.3.2(A). Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the INSPECTOR, shall be non-reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C 33.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

1. Products:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.



312313-5

b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. l. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem Clear. m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

1. Use a preformed asphalt-impregnated expansion joint filler 1/4 inch thick for curbs and sidewalks conforming to Section 201-3.2 of the Standard Specifications.

B. Expansion Joint Sealer:

1. Expansion joint sealer shall be a two part polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227, Class A, self-leveling, colored to match the concrete.

C. Finish Coat: 1. Finish coat shall consist of Class B mortar per subsection 201.5.1 of the

Standard Specifications.

D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows:

1. Type V for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.



312313-6

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.



312313-7

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

D. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.



312313-8

H. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

J. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: 1. Surfaces Sloped Less than 6%: Provide a medium salt (medium broom) finish by

drawing a soft bristle broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform fine line texture.

2. Surfaces Sloped greater than 6%: Provide a slip resistant (heavy broom finish) by striating surface 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.



312313-9

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2

inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge:

Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.



312313-10


A. Testing for Portland Cement Concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition, Section 201-1.1.5.

B. Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, or not less than once for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or not less than once for each 2,000 square feet of surface area for slabs. Additional samples for seven-day compressive strength tests shall be taken for each class of concrete at the beginning of the concrete work or whenever the mix or aggregate is changed.

C. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the Owner, and the CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance and facilities to the INSPECTOR in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of excess material.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to District’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by District’s Representative but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by District’s Representative.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Flood Tests: Before final acceptance, and after concrete has thoroughly cured, all concrete pavement, including swales and curb & gutter, shall be water tested to ensure proper drainage as directed by the Inspector. The Contractor shall provide water for this purpose. The flooding shall be done by water tank truck. Concrete work where water ponds and does not run off in a reasonable amount of time (1-hour), shall be removed to the nearest score or joint line and replaced to provide proper drainage.



312313-11

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by District’s Representative, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

3.11 CLEAN UP

A. Do not allow any concrete spill or waste on planting area.

B. Guard against graffiti; guarding shall be 24 hours a day if necessary. All marked, defective or defaced material shall be replaced by removing the entire section between construction joints.

C. Remove all concrete debris and spill from all planting areas, leaving the area clean and free of all noxious materials.



PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

321373-1

SECTION 321373 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.


1. Division 32 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.

2. Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.



321373-2


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than six pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.



321373-3

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by District’s Representative from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated:

1. Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Products: 1) Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-300. 2) Dow Corning Corporation; 888. 3) Or equal

2. Coal-Tar-Modified Polymer Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Products:

1) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Gardox. 2) Tremco, Dymeric® 240 3) Or equal

3. Bitumen-Modified Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.



321373-4

a. Products:

1) Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division; Vulkem 202. 2) BASF Master Seal HLM-5000. 3) Or equal

B. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS.

1. Products:

a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. c. Or equal

C. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, self-leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL.

1. Products:

a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. c. Or equal

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.



321373-5

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.



321373-6

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and

that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

3.6 Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
